Toshiba DVD Recorder DVR670KU User Manual
DVD VIDEO RECORDER / VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER  
DVR670KU  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
Owner’s Record  
The model number and serial number are on the back  
of your DVD Recorder. Record these numbers in the spaces  
below. Refer to these numbers whenever you  
communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this DVD  
Recorder.  
Model number:  
Printed in China  
1VMN26856 / E9SK0UD  
Serial number:  
© 2009 Toshiba Corporation  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_cover.indd 2-3  
2009/04/03 16:23:49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS  
APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
APPARATUS SHALL NOT BE EXPOSED TO DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND NO OBJECTS  
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an  
CAUTION  
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
presence of uninsulated“dangerous voltage”within the  
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude  
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.  
DO NOT OPEN  
CAUTION:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT  
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLE  
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED  
SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is  
intended to alert the user to the presence of important  
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in  
the literature accompanying the appliance.  
The important note is located on the rear or bottom of  
the cabinet.  
The symbol for CLASS ll (Double Insulation)  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
1. Read these instructions.  
2. Keep these instructions.  
3. Heed all warnings.  
4. Follow all instructions.  
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6. Clean only with dry cloth.  
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on  
or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience  
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
apparatus.  
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
bracket, or table specified by the  
accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.  
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.  
When a cart is used, use caution when  
moving the cart/apparatus combination to  
avoid injury from tip-over.  
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,  
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including  
amplifiers) that produce heat.  
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades  
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug  
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide  
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If  
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult  
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or  
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects  
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has  
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
Additional Safety Instructions  
15.Do not overload wall outlets; extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or  
electric shock.  
16.Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be  
placed on the apparatus.  
17.Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.  
18.Do not place a heavy object on or step on the apparatus. The object may fall, causing serious personal injury and  
serious damage to the apparatus.  
19.Do not use a cracked , deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal  
injury and apparatus malfunction.  
20.If the apparatus should smoke or smell, immediately disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet. Wait until the  
smoke or smell stops, then ask your dealer for a check and repair. Neglecting to do so may cause fire.  
21.While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting cables or the apparatus.  
22.Warning: To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times.  
2
EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
2
2009/04/03 15:36:06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
FCC WARNING  
This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this equipment may  
cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the manual. The user could lose the  
authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.  
RADIO-TV INTERFERENCE  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,  
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
2) Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
3) Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Disconnect the mains plug to shut off when find trouble or not in use. The mains plug shall remain readily operable.  
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.  
WARNING: Batteries (Battery pack or battery installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, or the like.  
LASER SAFETY  
This apparatus employs a laser. Only a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this  
apparatus, due to possible eye injury.  
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may  
result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock defeated. Do not stare into beam.  
LOCATION: Inside, near the deck mechanism.  
IMPORTANT COPYRIGHT INFORMATION  
Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited. This product incorporates  
copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this  
copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Do not place the unit on the furniture that is capable of being tilted by a child and an adult leaning, pulling, standing  
or climbing on it. A falling unit can cause serious injury or even death.  
To Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.  
• Do not pull on the power cord when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Grasp it by the plug.  
• Do not put your fingers or objects into the unit.  
Location and Handling  
• Do not install the unit in direct sunlight, near strong magnetic fields, or in a place subject to dust or strong vibration.  
• Avoid a place with drastic temperature changes.  
• Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place anything directly on top or bottom of the unit.  
Depending on your external devices, noise or disturbance of the picture and/or sound may be generated if the unit is  
placed too close to them. In this case, please ensure enough space between the external devices and the unit.  
• Depending on the environment, the temperature of this unit may increase slightly. This is not a malfunction.  
• Be sure to remove the disc and unplug the AC power cord from the outlet before carrying the unit.  
EN  
3
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
3
2009/04/03 15:36:07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
Dew Condensation Warning  
• Dew condensation may form inside the unit in the following conditions. If so, do not use this unit at least for a few  
hours until its inside gets dry.  
- The unit is moved from a cold place to a warm place.  
- Under conditions of high humidity.  
- After heating a cold room.  
Note about Recycling  
• This unit’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials in  
accordance with your local recycling regulations.  
• Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with your local  
regulations concerning chemical wastes.  
Notice for Progressive Scan Output  
• Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may  
cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of picture problems with 525(480) progressive scan output,  
it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the ‘standard definition’ output. If there are questions  
regarding your TV set compatibility with this 525p(480p) DVD player, please contact Toshiba Customer Service.  
Installation Location  
Supplied Accessories  
For safety and optimum performance of this unit:  
remote control with  
batteries (AAx2)  
RF coaxial cable  
• Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do  
not place anything directly on top of the unit. Do not  
place the unit directly on top of the TV.  
• Shield it from direct sunlight and keep it away from  
devices of intense heat. Avoid dusty or humid places.  
Avoid places with insufficient ventilation for proper  
heat dissipation. Do not block the ventilation holes on  
the sides of the unit. Avoid locations subject to strong  
vibration or strong magnetic fields.  
RCA audio/video cables  
owner’s manual  
Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
• If, by accident, water is spilled on this unit, unplug  
the power cord immediately and take the unit to our  
Authorized Service Center for servicing.  
About Copyright  
quick setup guide  
return stop sheet  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision  
of television programs, videotapes, DVDs and other  
materials, is prohibited under the copyright laws of the  
United States and other countries, and may subject you  
to civil and/or criminal liability.  
Note to CATV system installer  
This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system  
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National  
Electrical Code, which provides guidelines for proper  
grounding - in particular, specifying that the cable  
ground shall be connected to the grounding system of  
the building, as close to the point of cable entry as  
possible.  
4
EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
4
2009/04/03 15:36:07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
Maintenance  
Servicing  
• Please refer to relevant topics on “TROUBLESHOOTING”  
on pages 114-117 before returning the product.  
IR Signal Check  
If the remote control does not work properly, you can test if  
the remote control sends out the infrared signal with AM  
radio or a digital camera (including built-in camera of cellular  
phone). It will help to define the cause of malfunction.  
• If you need to call a customer service representative,  
please know the model number and serial number of  
your product before you call. This information is  
displayed on the back of the product. Also, please take  
a moment to identify the problem you are having, and  
be prepared to explain this to the representative. If you  
believe the representative will need to help you with  
operations, please stay near the product. Our  
•
With an AM radio:  
Tune an AM radio to a station with no  
broadcasting. Press a button on remote  
control toward the radio. Sound will be  
fluttering when you press any key and the  
radio receives the signal. This means the  
remote control is working.  
•
With a digital camera (including built-in camera of  
cellular phone):  
Direct a digital camera to remote control,  
press and hold a button on remote control. If  
infrared light appears through digital camera,  
the remote control is working.  
representatives will be happy to assist you.  
Cleaning the Cabinet  
• Wipe the front panel and other exterior surfaces of the  
unit with a soft, slightly damp cloth.  
• Never use a solvent, thinner, benzene or alcohol to  
clean the unit. Do not spray insecticide liquid near the  
unit. Such chemicals may discolor the surface or  
damage the unit.  
Manufactured under license from  
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the  
double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
Cleaning Discs  
• When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning  
cloth. Wipe the disc from the center to out. Do not  
wipe in a circular motion.  
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,  
commercially available cleaners, detergent, abrasive  
cleaning agents or antistatic spray intended for analog  
records.  
Dolby Digital Recording  
“Dolby® Digital Recording enables consumers to record  
high-quality video with stereo sound on recordable DVD  
discs. The technology, when utilized instead of PCM  
recording, also saves recordable disc space, allowing for  
higher video resolution or extended recording time on  
each DVD. DVDs created using Dolby Digital Recording  
will play back on all DVD-video players.”  
Cleaning the Disc Lens  
• If this unit still does not perform properly although you  
refer to the relevant sections and to  
“TROUBLESHOOTING” in this owner’s manual, the laser  
optical pickup unit may be dirty. Consult your dealer or  
an Authorized Service Center for inspection and  
cleaning of the laser optical pickup unit.  
Note: This is true when the players are compatible with  
actual recordable DVD discs.  
Manufactured under license under U.S.  
Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and  
worldwide patents issued & pending.  
DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered  
trademarks and the DTS logos and  
Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
©1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
Disc Handling  
• Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not  
adhere to the surfaces of the discs.  
• Always store the disc in its protective case when it is  
not used.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-  
Definition Multimedia Interface  
are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of HDMI Licensing  
LLC.  
Auto Head Cleaning  
• Automatically cleans video heads as you insert or  
remove a cassette, so you can see a clear picture.  
•
Playback picture may become blurred or interrupted  
while the TV program reception is clear. Dirt accumulated  
on the video heads after a long period of use, or the  
usage of rental or worn tapes can cause this problem. If  
a streaky or snowy picture appears during playback, the  
video heads in your unit may need to be cleaned.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos  
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used  
under license.  
1. Please visit your local Audio/Video store and purchase a  
good quality VHS video head cleaner.  
2. If a video head cleaner does not solve the problem,  
please consult your dealer or an Authorized Service  
Center.  
“WMA” (Windows Media Audio) is a new audio codec  
developed by Microsoft® in the United States of America.  
Note  
• Remember to read the instructions along with the  
video head cleaner before use.  
• Clean video heads only when problems occur.  
EN  
5
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
5
2009/04/03 15:36:08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
Introduction  
Disc Management  
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Symbols Used in this Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Installing the Batteries in the Remote Control . . . . . . 12  
Using a Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
THE VCR / DVD RECORDER SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS . . . . 15  
On-Screen Display / Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
FORMATTING A DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Choosing the Recording Format of a Brand-New  
DVD-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Reformatting a Disc Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
SETTING A DISC TO PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS . . . . . 42  
Auto Finalizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Finalizing a Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Recording  
INFORMATION ON DVD RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Recording Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Restrictions on Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Make Recording Compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Setting for Auto Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Recording the DTV Closed Caption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Recording Audio Select (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Setting Aspect Ratio for Video Mode Recording . . . . 47  
BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER  
Connections  
CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Antenna Connection (Required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting to a TV Using Audio / Video Out Jacks . 20  
Connecting to a TV Using the S-Video Out Jack . . . . 21  
Connecting to a TV Using Component  
Video Out Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI™  
Compatible Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Connecting to a Cable / Satellite Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting to a TV without Audio / Video Jacks . . . 24  
Digital Audio Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
TIMER RECORDING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Hints for Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Connection to an External Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Recording from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
DV DUBBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Guide to DV and On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
DVC to DVD Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
DVC to VCR Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Basic Setup  
INITIAL SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
CHANNEL SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Auto Channel Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Adding/Deleting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
SETTING THE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Auto Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Manual Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Daylight Saving Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
TUNER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Switching Analog Mode / Digital Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Channel Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Selecting TV Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
DTV Closed Caption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Closed Caption Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
6
EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
6
2009/04/03 15:36:10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
Playback  
Editing  
DVD/VCR DUBBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Structure of Disc Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
BASIC PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Direct Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Playback from the Title List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Playing Back an Audio CD and a CD-RW/-R with MP3/  
WMA/JPEG Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Playing Back a DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Using the Title/Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
SPECIAL PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Resume Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Skipping TV Commercials During Playback. . . . . . . . . 69  
Rapid Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Step by Step Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Slow Forward / Slow Reverse Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Marker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Chasing Playback during Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Simultaneous Playback and Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Title/Chapter Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Track Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Time Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/  
INFORMATION ON DISC EDITING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Guide to a Title List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Editing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
DELETING TITLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Adding Titles to a Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Erasing All Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
EDITING DISCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Putting Names on Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Setting Chapter Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Hiding Chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Deleting a Part of a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Dividing a Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Combining Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Setting or Releasing the Title Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Setting or Clearing All Chapter Marks at Once. . . . . . 95  
Function Setup  
LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
GENERAL SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
DivX® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Reset All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
SLIDE SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Repeat Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Random Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Program Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO . . 78  
Switching Subtitles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Switching Audio Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Switching Virtual Surround System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Switching Camera Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Reducing Block Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Adjusting Black Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
VCR Function  
VCR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Information on VCR Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Time Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Others  
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Frequently Asked Questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
LANGUAGE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
EN  
7
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
7
2009/04/03 15:36:10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FEATURES  
This unit not only plays back DVD, CD and cassette tape but also offers features for you to record on DVD/cassette tape and  
edit them after that. The following features are offered with this unit.  
Recording  
Editing  
DVD mode VCR mode  
DVD mode  
Deleting titles:  
This unit is compatible with recording on DVD-RW/+RW  
which is recordable repeatedly and DVD-R/+R which accept  
the additional recordings until the disc becomes full but  
not overwritable. Also, this unit allows you to record to the  
cassette tape.  
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore.  
Setting or clearing chapter marks:  
You can set or clear chapter marks on titles.  
Hiding chapters:  
To keep others from playing back some chapters without  
permission, you can hide chapters.  
Up to 12 program recording:  
You can program the unit to record up to 12 programs,  
within a month in advance. Daily or weekly program  
recordings are also available.  
Deleting parts of titles:  
You can delete a specific part of a title.  
Dividing or combining titles:  
You can divide or combine a title.  
One-touch timer recording (OTR):  
You can easily set a recording time as you prefer. Every time  
[REC I] is pressed during recording, the recording time will  
be increased by 30 minutes up to 8 hours. The recording  
automatically stops when the recording time you set is  
reached.  
Editing title names:  
You can change the title name you prefer.  
Compatibility  
Dubbing mode:  
DVD mode  
You can copy a DVD to a cassette tape or copy a cassette  
tape to a DVD. This function will be possible only if the DVD  
or a cassette tape is not copy protected. You cannot record  
on a cassette tape when its erase-protection tab is removed.  
Available for playing back discs on a regular DVD player:  
Recorded discs can be played back on regular DVD players,  
including computer DVD drives compatible with DVD-video  
playback. Although DVD+RW/+R are playable on other units  
without finalization in most cases, it is recommended to  
finalize in order to stabilize the performance.  
DV dubbing:  
This function helps you to easily dub the contents of the DVC  
(digital video camcorder) to DVD and VCR.  
Left channel stereo recording:  
This unit can record the sound of the left channel monaural  
input as left and right channels automatically.  
Others  
DVD mode  
Automatic chapter mark setting:  
DVD mode VCR mode  
Progressive scan system  
Chapter marks will be put on recordings as you set before  
Unlike conventional interlace scanning, the progressive scan  
system provides less flickering and images in higher  
resolution than that of traditional television signals.  
attempting to record.  
Automatic title menu making:  
The unit creates title menu automatically when finalizing discs.  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
Automatic playlist making:  
You can enjoy clearer audio/video output when connecting  
this unit to a display device with an HDMI-compatible port.  
The unit creates a playlist automatically after recording VR  
mode DVD-RW.  
Automatic title finalizing:  
For video mode DVD-RW/-R and DVD+R recording, you can  
finalize discs automatically after finishing all timer recordings  
or at the end of the disc space if you set this in the main menu.  
Symbols Used in this Owner’s Manual  
To specify for what disc type each function is, we put the  
following symbols at the beginning of each item to operate.  
Symbol Description  
Playback  
For Recording, Playing Back, and Editing  
Description refers to DVD-RW in video mode  
DVD mode  
Theater surround sound in your home:  
When connecting the unit to an amplifier or a decoder which is  
compatible with Dolby Digital or DTS, you can experience the  
theater surround sound from discs with surround sound system.  
Description refers to DVD-RW in VR mode  
Description refers to DVD-R in video mode  
Description refers to DVD+RW  
Quick search for what you want to watch:  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the  
search function. Search for a desired point on a disc by title,  
chapter/track or time.  
Virtual surround system:  
Description refers to DVD+R  
Description refers to VHS tapes  
You can enjoy stereophonic space through your existing 2  
channel stereo system.  
Use only cassettes marked VHS (  
).  
Playing back MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files:  
You can enjoy MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® files which are  
recorded on CD-RW/-R.  
For Playback only  
DivX® files can also be recorded on DVD-RW/-R and DVD+RW/+R.  
Description refers to DVD-video  
Description refers to audio CD  
VCR mode  
Quick search for what you want to watch:  
You can go to a specific point on a cassette tape by entering  
the exact amount of time you wish to skip.  
You can easily find the part you want to watch using the index  
search/time search functions. An index mark will be assigned  
at the beginning of each recording you make. For time search  
function, you can go to a specific point on a cassette tape by  
entering the exact amount of time you wish to skip.  
Description refers to CD-RW/-R with MP3 files  
Description refers to CD-RW/-R with WMA files  
Description refers to CD-RW/-R with JPEG files  
Description refers to DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R  
®
and CD-RW/-R with DivX files  
If you do not find any of the symbols listed above under the  
function heading, the operation is applicable to all media.  
8
EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
8
2009/04/03 15:36:10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FEATURES  
Discs for Recording, Playing back  
Disc type  
Logo  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+R  
Automatically  
formatted in  
video mode  
Automatically  
formatted in  
+VR mode  
Automatically  
formatted in  
+VR mode  
Can be formatted in VR or video  
mode  
Format  
Video Mode  
VR Mode  
Icon  
Maximum record 480 min (12cm) 480 min (12cm) 480 min (12cm) 480 min (12cm) 480 min (12cm)  
time 144 min (8cm)  
144 min (8cm)  
144 min (8cm)  
144 min (8cm)  
144 min (8cm)  
1×-6×  
Disc Speed  
Versions  
1×-16×  
Ver.2.0/2.1  
Ver.1.1/1.2  
1×-4×  
1×-16×  
Ver.1.1/1.2 CPRM compatible  
Playable on  
DVD+RW  
compatible  
players.  
Finalization  
recommended.  
(title menu will  
be created)  
Playable on  
most DVD  
players.  
Playable on  
most DVD  
players.  
Playable on  
most DVD  
Playable only  
on VR mode  
players.  
Compatibility Finalization  
necessary.  
compatible unit. Finalization  
Finalization necessary.  
recommended. (title menu will  
be created)  
Finalization  
recommended.  
(title menu will  
be created)  
(title menu will  
be created)  
Recording Features  
Record TV  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
programs  
Reuse by deleting  
the current  
contents  
✓
✓
Record 16:9 size  
pictures  
✓
✓
✓
Record copy-once  
programs  
✓*  
Create chapters  
at fixed intervals  
(auto chapter)  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Editing Features  
Scene delete  
Playlist Original  
✓
✓
Edit title name  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Create chapters  
wherever you like  
(chapter mark)  
✓
✓
Divide a title  
Combine titles  
Hide chapters  
Delete a title  
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Create a  
playlist  
Protect a title  
✓: Available  
Gray: Not available  
*CPRM compatible disc only.  
EN  
9
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd  
9
2009/04/03 15:36:11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FEATURES  
Discs for playing back  
DVD-VIDEO  
Disc Type  
Logo  
CD-DA  
CD-RW  
CD-R  
Icon  
Files for playing back  
MP3  
Recording/Playing back  
Type of title  
Icon  
WMA  
JPEG  
DivX®  
VCR  
CD-RW/-R  
DVD-RW/-R  
DVD+RW/+R  
Media  
CD-RW/-R  
CD-RW/-R  
CD-RW/-R  
Cassette Tape  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. Following discs are recommended for good recording  
quality and are proven to be compatible with this unit.  
However, depending on the media condition, the unit  
may not read the disc properly.  
• Official DivX® Certified product  
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with  
standard playback of DivX® media files  
• Discs containing the DivX® files with the DivX® GMC (Global  
Motion Compensation) playback feature, which is DivX®  
supplemental function, cannot be played back on this unit.  
* This unit cannot play back the disc contents protected  
by Windows Media Digital Rights Management (DRM).  
Verbatim DVD+R 8x, DVD+RW 4x, DVD-R 8x, DVD-RW 2x  
JVC  
DVD-RW 4x  
Maxell  
SONY  
TDK  
DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD-R 8x/16x  
DVD+R 4x/8x/16x, DVD+RW 4x  
DVD+R 4x/8x/16x  
Performance of any other discs are not guaranteed.  
Unplayable Discs  
• Toshiba is not liable for any damage or loss caused directly  
or indirectly by the malfunction of this recorder, including,  
without limitation, any one of the following:  
• Failure to record contents intended to be recorded by  
the consumer.  
The following discs will not play back on this unit.  
• CD-ROM  
• Video Single Disc (VSD) • DVD-ROM  
• DVD-audio  
• DVD-RW/-R recorded in non compatible recording format  
• Blu-ray Disc  
On the following disc, the sound may not be heard.  
• Compact Disc-Interactive (CD-I)  
• Failure to edit contents as intended by the consumer.  
• Unfinalized disc  
• When a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R disc created on this  
recorder is used (e.g., insertion, playback, recording or  
editing) in another DVD player, recorder or personal  
computer drive.  
• When a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R disc that is used in  
the manner described in the immediately preceding  
bullet point is used again in this recorder.  
• When a DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R disc that was  
recorded in another DVD recorder, or in a personal  
computer drive is used in this recorder.  
• HD DVD  
• Super audio CD - Only the sound on the CD layer can be  
heard. The sound on the high-density super audio CD  
layer cannot be heard.  
Color Systems  
DVD is recorded in different color systems throughout  
the world. The most common color system is NTSC  
(which is used primarily in the United States and Canada).  
This unit uses NTSC, so DVD you play back must be  
recorded in the NTSC system. You cannot play back DVD  
recorded in other color systems.  
• Some functions may not work with personal computer  
discs.  
• Discs recorded in this recorder may not operate as  
expected on other DVD players, recorders or personal  
computer drives.  
Because of problems and errors that can occur during the  
creation of DVD and CD software and/or the manufacture  
of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that this DVD  
Video Recorder will successfully play every disc bearing the  
DVD and CD logos. If you happen to experience any  
difficulty playing a DVD and/or CD disc on this DVD Video  
Recorder, please contact Toshiba Customer Service.  
Region Codes  
This unit has been designed to play back DVD  
with region 1. DVD must be labeled for ALL  
regions or for region 1 in order to play back on  
the unit. You cannot play back DVD that are  
labeled for other regions. Look for the symbols  
on the right on your DVD. If these region  
symbols do not appear on your DVD, you cannot  
play back the DVD in this unit.  
DVD players with  
are capable of playing DVD-RW  
recorded in VR mode.  
The number inside the globe refers to region of the world.  
A DVD labeled for a specific region can only play back on  
the unit with the same region code.  
10 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 10  
2009/04/03 15:36:13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW  
Front Panel  
1
2
3*  
4
5
6
7
DVR670  
( ) The unit can also be  
*
turned on by pressing  
these buttons or by  
inserting a cassette tape.  
22 21 20 1918 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9* 8  
13. DUBBING button  
1. I/y ON/STANDBY button  
• Press to start VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR) duplication which  
you set in the main menu.  
• Press to turn on the unit, or to turn the unit into the  
standby mode. (To completely shut down the unit, you  
must unplug the AC power cord.)  
2. Cassette compartment (VCR)  
• Insert a cassette tape here.  
14. CHANNEL  
/
buttons  
• Press to change the channel up and down.  
15. Display  
• Refer to “FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE” on page 18.  
16. Infrared sensor window  
3. A OPEN/CLOSE button (DVD)*  
• Press to open or close the disc tray.  
4. Disc tray (DVD)  
• Receive signals from your remote control so that you can  
control the unit from a distance.  
• Place a disc when it is open.  
17. I REC button (VCR)  
5. VIDEO input jack (L2)  
• Press once to start a recording. Press repeatedly to start the  
one-touch timer recording.  
• Use to connect external device with an RCA video cable.  
6. AUDIO input jacks (L2)  
18. PLAY B button (VCR)  
• Use to connect external device with an RCA audio cable.  
7. DV input jack (L3)  
• Press to start playback.  
19. EJECT/STOP A/ C button (VCR)  
• Use to connect the DV output of external device with a DV  
cable.  
• When the unit is in stop mode, press to remove the cassette  
tape from the cassette compartment.  
8. I REC button (DVD)  
• Press to stop cassette tape playback or recording.  
• Press to stop the proceeding timer recording in VCR.  
20. FWD D button (VCR)  
• Press once to start a recording.  
• Press repeatedly to start the one-touch timer recording.  
9. PLAY B button (DVD)*  
• Press to rapidly advance the cassette tape, or view the  
picture rapidly in forward during playback (forward search).  
21. REW E button (VCR)  
• Press to start or resume playback.  
10. STOP C button (DVD)  
• Press to stop playback or recording.  
• Press to stop the proceeding timer recording in DVD.  
11. VCR/DVD indicator  
• Press to rewind the cassette tape, or to view the picture  
rapidly in reverse during playback (rewind search).  
22. Power indicator  
• Lights up when the VCR/DVD output mode is selected.  
12. SELECT button  
• This indicator lights up in green when the unit is active and  
turns off when the unit is in standby mode.  
• Press to select the component you wish to operate.  
Rear Panel  
1
2
3
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6  
5
4
1. AC Power Cord  
10. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks  
• Use to connect a TV monitor with component video inputs  
with a component video cable.  
• Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to this unit.  
• Unplug this cord from the AC outlet to completely shut down  
the unit.  
11. S-VIDEO OUT jack  
2. HDMI OUT jack  
• Use to connect the S-video input of a TV monitor, AV receiver  
or other device with an S-video cable.  
12. AUDIO OUT jacks  
• Use an HDMI cable to connect to a display with an HDMI  
compatible port.  
3. ANTENNA OUT jack  
• Use to connect a TV monitor, AV receiver or other device  
with an RCA audio cable.  
• Use to connect an RF coaxial cable to pass the signal from  
the ANTENNA IN to your TV.  
13. COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack  
• Use to connect an AV receiver, Dolby Digital decoder or  
other device with a coaxial digital input jack with a digital  
coaxial cable.  
4. ANTENNA IN jack  
• Use to connect an antenna.  
5. AUDIO OUT jacks  
• Use to connect a TV monitor, AV receiver or other device  
with an RCA audio cable.  
Note  
6. VIDEO OUT jack  
• Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear  
panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent  
damage to the unit.  
• Use to connect a TV monitor, AV receiver or other device  
with an RCA video cable.  
7. VIDEO IN jack (L1)  
• Use to connect external device with an RCA video cable.  
8. AUDIO IN jacks (L1)  
• This unit does not have the RF modulator.  
Caution on using S-video, component, or HDMI  
connection for VCR:  
• Only the playback audio / video is available with  
these connections.  
• Use to connect external device with an RCA audio cable.  
9. S-VIDEO IN jack (L1)  
• Use to connect the S-video output of external device with  
an S-video cable.  
EN 11  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 11  
2009/04/03 15:36:16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW  
Remote Control  
Installing the Batteries in the Remote  
Control  
Using a Remote Control  
Keep in mind the following when using the remote  
control:  
Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote  
control and the infrared sensor window on the unit.  
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the infrared  
sensor window of the unit.  
• Remote control for different devices can interfere with  
each other. Avoid using remote control for other device  
located close to the unit.  
Install the batteries (AAx2) matching the polarity  
indicated inside battery compartment of the remote  
control.  
•
Open the cover.  
1
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the  
operating range of the remote control.  
• The maximum operable ranges from the unit are as  
follows.  
- Line of sight: approx. 23 feet (7m)  
- Either side of the center:  
approx. 23 feet (7m) within 30°  
Insert batteries.  
DVR670  
2
30˚  
30˚  
23feet (7m)  
23feet (7m)  
23feet (7m)  
Make sure to match + and - on the batteries to  
the marks indicated in the battery compartment.  
18  
19  
1
2
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Close the cover.  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
3
20  
3
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
4
5
21  
22  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
6
23  
28  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
7
8
9
24  
Caution:  
ENTER  
25  
26  
Never throw batteries into a fire.  
Note:  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
• Be sure to use AA size batteries.  
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.  
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the  
environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in  
accordance with applicable laws and regulations.  
• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if  
the operating range becomes reduced, replace  
batteries with new ones.  
• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote  
control, always replace both batteries with new ones.  
Never mix battery types or use new and used  
batteries in combination.  
SKIP  
PLAY  
27  
29  
30  
10  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
11  
13  
12  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
31  
33  
35  
VCR  
14  
15  
16  
32  
34  
36  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
17  
37  
SE-R0294  
• Always remove batteries from remote control if they  
are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for  
an extended period of time. This will prevent battery  
acid from leaking into the battery compartment.  
12 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 12  
2009/04/03 15:36:18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW  
Remote Control  
Using a Remote Control (cont’d)  
( ) The unit can also be turned on by pressing these buttons.  
*
18. HDMI button (DVD)  
1. INPUT SELECT  
button  
• Press to set the HDMI video resolution.  
19. I/y ON/STANDBY button  
• Press to select the appropriate input.  
2. OPEN/CLOSE A button  
• Press to turn on the unit, or to turn the unit into the standby  
mode. (To completely shut down the unit, you must unplug the  
AC power cord).  
DVD mode:  
• Press to open or close the disc tray.  
VCR mode:  
20. CH  
/
buttons  
• Press to remove the cassette tape from the cassette  
compartment.  
DVD mode:  
• Press to change the channel up and down.  
VCR mode:  
3. Number/Character buttons  
• Press to enter values for the settings in the main menu.  
• Press to select channel numbers.  
DVD mode:  
• Press to change the channel up and down.  
• Press to adjust the tracking during playback or in slow motion  
of the cassette tape.  
• Press to select a title/chapter/track/file on display.  
• Press to enter title names.  
•
While playback is in still mode, you can stabilize the picture.  
21. TIMER PROG. button  
VCR mode:  
• Press to display the timer programming list.  
• Press to start the index/time search.  
4. Confirm ( − ) button  
22. AUDIO  
button  
DVD mode:  
Analog mode:  
• During playback, press to display the audio menu.  
VCR mode:  
• Press to confirm the channel selection made by  
[the Number buttons].  
• During the playing of a HiFi video tape, press to change the  
audio out setting to HiFi or mono.  
Digital mode:  
• Press to confirm the major / minor channel selection made by  
[the Number buttons].  
23. DISPLAY button  
• Press to display the display menu on or off.  
24. TOP MENU button (DVD)  
5. DTV/TV button  
• Press to switch between digital TV (DTV) mode and analog TV  
(TV) mode.  
• Press to display the title list.  
25. ENTER button  
6. SETUP button  
• Press to confirm or select menu items.  
26. RETURN button  
• Press to display the main menu.  
• During DVD playback, press and hold for more than 3 seconds  
to switch the progressive scanning mode to the interlace mode.  
(Though appears, the output mode switches to the interlace  
• Press to return to the previous displayed menu screen.  
27. TIME SLIP button (DVD)  
• Press once to start recording the TV program you are watching.  
Press again to watch the content being recorded from the  
beginning while recording continues. (VR mode DVD-RW with  
the recording mode of LP, EP or SLP only)  
28. 1.3x/0.8x PLAY button (DVD)  
and “  
briefly.)  
” will be displayed on the front panel display  
7. DISC MENU button (DVD)  
• Press to display the disc menu. To change original and playlist  
on the TV screen.  
• During playback, press to play back in a slightly faster/slower  
speed while keeping the sound output.  
29. FWD D button  
8. Cursor K / L / { / B buttons  
• Press to select items or settings.  
9. CLEAR button  
DVD mode:  
DVD mode:  
• During playback, press to fast forward playback.  
• When playback is in pause, press to slow forward playback.  
VCR mode:  
• Press to clear the password once entered, to cancel the  
programming for CD, to clear the selecting marker number in  
the display menu, etc.  
• During playback, press to view the picture rapidly in forward.  
• Press to fast forward the cassette tape in stop mode.  
• When playback is paused, press to view the cassette tape in  
slow motion.  
VCR mode:  
• Press to reset the tape counter.  
10. INSTANT SKIP button (DVD)  
• During playback, press to skip 30 seconds.  
11. REV E button  
30. SKIP G button (DVD)  
•
During playback, press to skip to the next chapter, track or file.  
DVD mode:  
• When playback is in pause, press repeatedly to forward the  
playback step by step.  
• During playback, press to fast reverse playback.  
• When playback is in pause, press to slow reverse playback.  
VCR mode:  
31. STOP C button  
• Press to stop playback or recording.  
DVD mode:  
•
During playback, press to view the picture rapidly in reverse.  
• Press to fast reverse the cassette tape in stop mode.  
12. PLAY B button  
• Press to exit from the title list.  
32. DVD button  
• Press to start playback or resume playback.  
13. SKIP H button (DVD)  
• Press to select the DVD output mode.  
33. VCR button  
• During playback, press to return to the beginning of the current  
chapter, track or file.  
• Press to select the VCR output mode.  
34. REC I button  
• During playback, press twice in quick succession to skip to the  
previous chapter or track.  
• Press once to start a recording.  
• Press repeatedly to start the one-touch timer recording.  
35. REC MODE button  
• When playback is in pause, press repeatedly to reverse the  
playback step by step.  
• Press to switch the recording mode.  
36. ZOOM button (DVD)  
14. PAUSE F button  
• Press to pause playback or recording.  
15. DUBBING button  
•
During playback, press to enlarge the picture on the TV screen.  
37. SEARCH button (VCR)  
• Press to start VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR) duplication which you  
set in the main menu.  
• Press to call up the index or time search menu.  
16. REPEAT button  
DVD mode:  
• Press to select the repeat mode.  
VCR mode:  
Note  
• Press to set or release the Auto Repeat Playback. In the Auto  
Repeat Playback mode, tape is played to its end, the tape will  
rewind to the beginning and start playback itself.  
17. TIMER SET button  
• If you turn off this unit, [OPEN/CLOSE A] on the remote  
control is not available.  
Be sure to use [AOPEN/CLOSE] or [EJECT/STOP A / C]  
on the unit.  
• Press to set the unit in the timer standby mode. In the timer  
standby mode, press to cancel the mode and to turn the unit  
on.  
EN 13  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 13  
2009/04/03 15:36:19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THE VCR / DVD RECORDER SWITCHING  
Because this product is a combination of a VCR and a DVD recorder, you must select first which component you wish  
to operate with [VCR/DVD].  
DVD mode  
VCR mode  
Press [DVD] on the remote control.  
Press [VCR] on the remote control.  
(Verify that the DVD indicator is lit.)  
(Verify that the VCR indicator is lit.)  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
DVR670  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
DVD indicator  
VCR indicator  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DVD button  
VCR button  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
Note  
• You cannot switch to another mode (DVD or VCR) in the timer-standby mode.  
• Playback will stop when you change the output mode.  
14 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 14  
2009/04/03 15:36:20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS  
This unit uses the following on-screen displays and menus to guide you to the easy operations.  
The on-screen displays give you the information on the loaded disc, the disc/file in playback, or the HDMI status, etc.  
The menus allow you to change the various kinds of settings for playing back, recording, or editing to suit your preference.  
On-Screen Display / Menu  
The on-screen display changes in the following order  
as you press [DISPLAY].  
Disc Information / Menu  
OFF  
DVD mode  
5
2
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
-
RW VR ORG  
DTV Program Guide (only in DTV mode)  
CH 10  
Disc Information/Menu  
6
1
3
Title Name Information  
(only when DVD+RW/+R, VR mode DVD-RW/-R, or  
unfinalized Video mode DVD-RW/-R is in playback)  
or  
SP  
1:53  
7
4
File Name Information  
(only when a CD with MP3/WMA/  
JPEG/DivX® files is in playback)  
* This is an example screen only for explanation.  
1. Indicates a disc type and format mode.  
2. Indicates a type of titles for VR mode DVD-RW .  
3. Indicates a channel number or selected external input  
mode.  
4. Indicates a recording mode and possible recording  
time left.  
MP3/WMA Tag Information  
(only when a MP3 or WMA file is in playback)  
5. Indicates a title number/total number of titles, chapter  
number/total number of chapters, elapsed time and  
total time of disc playback.  
HDMI Information  
(only for the images output through the HDMI output)  
6. Each icon means:  
: Search  
: Audio  
: Subtitle  
: Angle  
: Marker  
DTV Program Guide  
: Noise Reduction / Black Level  
: Zoom  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PROGRAM TITLE NAME  
123-45  
WLIW-DT  
ENGLISH  
90  
TV-PG  
: Surround  
INFORMATION-1  
INFORMATION-2  
INFORMATION-3  
INFORMATION-4  
INFORMATION-5  
INFORMATION-6  
: Repeat  
7. Indicates an operation status.  
Note  
• In some descriptions on this manual, only one disc  
type is indicated as an example.  
1. Program title (max. 2 lines displayed)  
2. Closed Caption (Indicates that the program being  
broadcast is available with closed captioning.)  
3. Signal strength (Indicates the signal strength of the  
current channel.)  
4. Program guide (max. 6 lines displayed)  
5. Channel number  
6. Broadcast station  
7. Audio language (“Other” is displayed when the  
audio language cannot be acquired, or the acquired  
languages are other than English, Spanish or French.)  
8. Program rating  
Note  
• When the program guide is displayed in more than 7  
lines, use [K / L] to scroll.  
• “No description provided.” is displayed when the  
program guide is not provided.  
EN 15  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 15  
2009/04/03 15:36:21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS  
On-Screen Display / Menu (cont’d)  
VCR Information  
MP3/WMA Tag Information  
VCR mode  
1
12:00AM  
2
SP  
0:00:00  
HIFI  
3
4
5
• If you press [DISPLAY] one more time, album name  
will be displayed.  
* This is an example screen only for explanation.  
1. Indicates current video status.  
2. Indicates the current time.  
Album Name  
3. Indicates a recording or playing back mode.  
4. Indicates a tape counter.  
5. Audio status of the current cassette tape.  
• If there is no artist, track or album name, “Not Available”  
will be displayed.  
HDMI Information  
Note  
• VCR information does not appear on the screen  
when the unit is connected by an HDMI,Component  
or S-Video cable, except during the playback.  
1
2
Video Info.  
Audio Info.  
:
:
480p  
Bitstream  
/
YCbCr  
Title/File Name Information  
3
Title name information  
Title Name  
My Title  
1. Indicates the resolution of the HDMI output image.  
2. Indicates the HDMI video format.  
3. Indicates the HDMI audio format.  
• “- - -” will be displayed, when it does not have any  
information.  
File name information  
File Name  
My File  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 16  
2009/04/03 15:36:22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GUIDE TO ON-SCREEN DISPLAYS AND MENUS  
Main Menu  
Press [SETUP] to display the main menu. Then use  
[K / L] to select a menu and press [ENTER] to display the  
menu. These menus provide entries to all main functions  
of the unit.  
1. General Setting:  
To go to general setting menu.  
2. Timer Programming:  
To program a timer recording.  
3. Title List:  
To call up the title list.  
4. DVD Menu:  
To set up the DVD setting.  
5. DISC Playback Mode:  
To set up the disc playback setting.  
• “DISC Playback Mode” is available only when an  
audio CD, a CD-RW/-R with MP3 / WMA / JPEG files is  
inserted into the unit.  
Setup  
General Setting  
1
Timer Programming  
Title List  
3
DVD Menu  
4
DISC Playback Mode  
5
General Setting Menu  
1. Playback:  
General Setting  
1
To set up the unit to play back discs as you prefer.  
2. Display:  
2
Playback  
Display  
Video  
Recording  
Clock  
Channel  
DivX  
HDMI  
3
4
To set up the OSD screen as you prefer.  
3. Video:  
To set up the video setting.  
4. Recording:  
To set up the unit to record to discs as you prefer.  
5. Clock:  
To set up the clock of the unit as you need.  
6. Channel:  
5
26  
37  
Reset All  
48  
59  
To adjust the channel setting of the unit as you prefer.  
7. DivX:  
To set up the setting for the DivX® playback.  
8. HDMI:  
To set up the HDMI connection setting.  
9. Reset All:  
To reset the setting to the factory default.  
DVD Menu / DISC Playback Mode  
<DVD Menu menu>  
1. Format: (DVD-RW, DVD+RW only)  
Allows you to format the disc.  
DVD Menu  
2. Finalize:  
1
2
3
4
Format  
Finalize  
Allows you to finalize a disc containing recorded titles.  
3. Disc Protect: (VR mode DVD-RW, DVD+RW/+R only)  
Allows you to protect a disc from accidental editing or  
recording.  
Disc Protect OFF  
ON  
Delete All Playlists  
4. Delete All Playlists: (VR mode DVD-RW only)  
Allows you to delete playlist.  
5. Random Play:  
<DISC Playback Mode menu>  
When Audio CD is inserted :  
Allows you to activate the random playback feature.  
6. Program Play: (Audio CD only)  
Allows you to activate the program playback feature.  
7. Music:  
DISC Playback Mode  
15  
26  
Random Play  
Program Play  
Allows you to make setting for MP3/WMA playback.  
8. Photo:  
Allows you to make setting for JPEG playback.  
9. Slide Show: (JPEG files only)  
Allows you to select the display time of the slide show  
mode.  
When a JPEG/MP3/WMA disc is inserted :  
DISC Playback Mode  
17  
28  
15  
91  
Music  
Photo  
Random Play  
Slide Show  
EN 17  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 17  
2009/04/03 15:36:23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY GUIDE  
2
3
DTV BS CS  
DR  
CD  
VCR  
1
PM  
4
DB HDD  
DVD  
5
1.  
4. Current status of the unit  
: Appears when this unit is in  
DVD output mode.  
: Appears when the timer  
recording is proceeding in  
DVD.  
: Appears when DVD is in the  
timer recording standby  
mode.  
: Flashes when a program  
cannot be performed for  
some reasons.  
DVD  
: Appears in the afternoon with  
the clock display.  
: Appears when playback is  
paused.  
PM  
2.  
: Appears when playing back a  
disc.  
: Appears when the channel is  
in DTV mode.  
DTV  
: Appears when the timer  
programming or OTR has  
been set and is proceeding.  
: Flashes when all timer  
recordings have been  
finished.  
3. Title / track / file and chapter mark  
: Appears when indicating a  
title/track number.  
: Appears when indicating a  
chapter number.  
: Appears during VCR to DVD  
duplication process.  
: Appears during DVD to VCR  
duplication process.  
DB  
: Appears during recording  
process.  
: Flashes when a recording  
pauses.  
5. Displays the following  
• Elapsed playback time  
• Current title / chapter / track / file  
number  
: Appears when this unit is in  
DVD output mode and a disc  
is in the unit.  
: Appears during duplication  
process.  
• Recording time / remaining time  
• Clock  
: Appears when this unit is in  
VCR output mode and a  
cassette tape is in the unit.  
• Channel number  
• Remaining time for one-touch  
timer recording  
: Appears during duplication  
process.  
• Selected HDMI video resolution  
: Appears when this unit is in  
VCR output mode.  
VCR  
: Appears when the timer  
recording is proceeding in VCR.  
: Appears when VCR is in the  
timer recording standby mode.  
: Flashes when a program  
cannot be performed for  
some reasons.  
Display Message  
Appears when the disc tray is  
opening.  
Appears when HDMI video  
resolution (480p) is selected.  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
Appears when HDMI video  
resolution (720p) is selected.  
Appears when the disc tray is  
closing.  
Appears when a disc is loaded  
on the disc tray.  
Appears when HDMI video  
resolution (1080i) is selected.  
Appears when data is being  
recorded on a disc.  
Appears when HDMI video  
resolution (1080p) is selected.  
18 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 18  
2009/04/03 15:36:24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTION  
Read this first:  
1) Disconnect the AC power cords of the devices from the AC outlet.  
2) Make the connection as illustrated below.  
3) After making all the connections, connect the AC power cords of the devices.  
•
Connect this unit directly to the TV. If the RCA audio/video cables are connected to a VCR, DVD playback pictures  
may be distorted due to the copy protection system.  
Antenna Connection (Required)  
rear of this unit  
RF coaxial  
cable  
ANT. IN  
This connection is for  
TV loop through only  
VHF / UHF  
antenna  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
or  
RF coaxial cable  
cable TV  
company  
Choose one of the following connections  
depending on the jacks on your TV.  
Note  
• For your safety and to avoid damage to the device, please unplug the RF coaxial cable from the ANTENNA IN jack before  
moving the unit.  
• If you use an antenna to receive analog TV, it should also work for DTV reception. Outdoor or attic antennas will be  
more effective than set-top versions.  
• ANTENNA OUT jack is for tuner pass through only. DVD playback through the RF is not possible.  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RF coaxial cable x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
Overview  
Refer to  
If Your TV has  
Higher  
Quality  
HDMI IN  
page  
22  
If you are using  
cable / satellite box  
page  
23  
page  
21  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
S-VIDEO IN  
If your device has  
only an ANT. IN jack  
page  
21  
page  
24  
page  
20  
ANT. IN  
Standard  
Quality  
R
L
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
EN 19  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 19  
2009/04/03 15:36:30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTION  
Connecting to a TV Using Audio / Video Out Jacks  
IN --- AUDIO---OUT  
AUDIO IN  
L
L
RCA audio cable  
R
R
VIDEO IN  
IN ---VIDEO---OUT  
RCA video cable  
rear of this unit  
ANT. IN  
This connection is for  
TV loop through only  
VHF / UHF  
antenna  
RF coaxial  
cable  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
or  
RF coaxial cable  
cable TV  
company  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RF coaxial cable x 1  
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1  
• RCA video cable x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
20 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 20  
2009/04/03 15:36:40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTION  
Connecting to a TV Using the S-Video Out Jack  
RCA audio cable  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO IN  
OUT  
S-VIDEO IN  
S-video cable  
ANT. IN  
This connection is for  
TV loop through only  
VHF / UHF  
antenna  
rear of this unit  
RF coaxial  
cable  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
or  
RF coaxial  
cable  
cable TV  
company  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RF coaxial cable x 1  
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
Connecting to a TV Using Component Video Out Jacks  
AUDIO IN  
L
RCA audio cable  
R
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
DVD / VCR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
(Green)  
(Blue)  
(Green)  
(Blue)  
Y
Y
RCA component  
video cable  
PB  
/CB  
PB  
/CB  
L
(Red)  
(Red)  
PR  
/CR  
PR  
/CR  
R
rear of this unit  
ANT. IN  
This connection is for  
TV loop through only  
RF coaxial  
cable  
VHF / UHF  
antenna  
OUT  
IN  
ANTENNA  
or  
RF coaxial  
cable  
cable TV  
company  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RF coaxial cable x 1  
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
EN 21  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 21  
2009/04/03 15:36:44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTION  
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI™ Compatible Port  
• HDMI outputs the video / audio signals without converting to analog signals.  
• No audio connection is required.  
HDMI IN  
HDMI cable  
rear of this unit  
ANT. IN  
This connection is for  
TV loop through only  
VHF / UHF  
antenna  
OUT  
RF coaxial  
cable  
Do not tilt the connector when inserting it into the HDMI jack, and make sure the  
shapes of the jack and the connector are matched.  
IN  
or  
ANTENNA  
RF coaxial cable  
cable TV  
company  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RF coaxial cable x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
HDMI Video Resolution and Actual Output Signals  
Press [HDMI] to select the HDMI video resolution. The video resolution mode changes as follows every time [HDMI] is  
pressed.  
Front Panel Display Video Output Signal  
Copyright protection system  
480 Progressive  
To play back the digital video images of a DVD via  
Press [HDMI]  
Press [HDMI]  
Press [HDMI]  
Press [HDMI]  
an HDMI connection, it is necessary that both the  
player and the display device (or an AV amplifier)  
support a copyright protection system called HDCP  
(high-bandwidth digital content protection  
system). HDCP is copy protection technology that  
comprises data encryption and authentication of  
the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP.  
Please read the operating instructions of your  
display device (or AV amplifier) for more  
information.  
720 Progressive  
1080 interlaced  
1080 Progressive  
*HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface  
• The HDMI mode that is not supported by display device will be skipped.  
Note  
• Some devices with an HDMI input may not operate properly with this unit.  
• When using an HDCP-incompatible display device, the image will not be viewed properly.  
• Among the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector; however, this unit cannot be  
controlled by another device via the HDMI connector.  
• The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequency, the number of channels and bit length) may be limited  
by the device that is connected.  
• Among the monitors that support HDMI, some do not support audio output (for example, projectors). In connections with device such as  
this unit, audio signals are not output from the HDMI output connector.  
• When this unit’s HDMI connector is connected to a DVI-D compatible monitor (HDCP compatible) with an HDMI-DVI converter cable, the  
signals are output in digital RGB.  
• When the power failure occurs, or when you unplug the unit, some problems in the HDMI setting might occur. Please check and set the  
HDMI setting again.  
• HDMI video resolution cannot be changed when the unit is in VCR mode.  
22 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 22  
2009/04/03 15:36:51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTION  
Connecting to a Cable / Satellite Box  
e.g.)  
RCA video cable  
RCA audio cable  
IN --- AUDIO---OUT  
L
AUDIO IN  
RCA audio  
cable  
R
L
L
AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT  
R
R
VIDEO IN  
IN ---VIDEO---OUT  
RCA video cable  
cable/satellite box  
RF coaxial  
cable  
rear of this unit  
ANT.OUT ANT. IN  
ANT. IN  
satellite  
dish  
This connection is for  
TV loop through only  
RF coaxial cable  
OUT  
or  
RF coaxial  
cable  
After making the connection as described above,  
make sure to select the appropriate input type by  
following the steps on page 55.  
cable TV  
company  
IN  
ANTENNA  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RF coaxial cable x 1  
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1  
• RCA video cable x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
Note  
• Required cables and connecting methods differ depending on the cable/satellite box.  
For more information, please contact your cable/satellite provider.  
• Instead of using VIDEO OUT jack of this unit, you can also use S-VIDEO OUT jack, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks or  
HDMI OUT jack for connecting to your TV.  
With this setup:  
• You can record any unscrambled channel by selecting the channel on the cable/satellite box. Be sure that the cable/  
satellite box is turned on.  
• You cannot record one channel while watching another channel.  
EN 23  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 23  
2009/04/03 15:36:59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTION  
Connecting to a TV without Audio / Video Jacks  
Set channel 3 or 4  
ANT. IN  
rear of this unit  
VHF / UHF  
antenna  
IN --- AUDIO---OUT  
L
OUT  
IN  
R
IN ---VIDEO---OUT  
ANTENNA  
or  
RF coaxial  
cable  
RF coaxial cable  
cable TV  
company  
RCA audio cable  
RCA video cable  
RF coaxial cable  
R
L
3
4
TO TV  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
CHANNEL  
ANT. IN  
RF modulator (not supplied)  
Set channel 3 or 4  
Note  
• RF modulator is not supplied  
with this unit. You need to  
purchase it at your local store.  
• The quality of picture may  
become poor if this unit is  
connected to an RF modulator.  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RF coaxial cable x 1  
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1  
• RCA video cable x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
Digital Audio Connection  
Coaxial Cable Connection  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
Dolby Digital decoder  
rear of this unit  
COAXIAL  
digital audio  
COAXIAL  
coaxial cable  
digital audio  
coaxial input jack  
HDMI Audio Connection  
AV receiver / amplifier with an HDMI input jack  
rear of this unit  
HDMI  
cable  
HDMI IN  
To set up “HDMI Audio”, refer to pages 98 and 108-109.  
No supplied cables are used in these connections:  
Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store.  
24 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 24  
2009/04/03 15:37:04  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTION  
Multi Channel Digital Audio Setting  
To set up “Dolby Digital”, refer to pages 96, 99 and 101.  
Setting in the Setup Menu  
Actual Audio Output  
DTS Setting of  
this unit  
(refer to page 101)  
Dolby Digital Setting  
of this unit (refer to  
page 101)  
Audio Format (disc)  
HDMI Out  
Digital Audio Out  
Stream  
PCM  
—
—
—
Dolby Digital  
2 channel PCM  
DTS  
Dolby Digital  
2 channel PCM  
DTS  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
—
No output  
No output  
Stream  
PCM  
2 channel PCM  
2 channel PCM  
2 channel PCM  
2 channel PCM  
LPCM  
Note  
• The audio source on a disc in a Dolby Digital multi channel surround format cannot be recorded as digital sound by  
an MD or DAT deck.  
• By connecting this unit to a Dolby Digital decoder, you can enjoy high-quality Dolby Digital multi channel surround  
sound as heard in the movie theaters.  
• By connecting this unit to the DTS decoder, you can enjoy Multi-channel Surround System which reproduces the  
original sound as truthfully as possible. Multi-channel Surround System is developed by the DTS, Inc.  
• Playing back a DVD using incorrect settings may generate noise distortion and may also damage the speakers.  
• For audio CD and MP3 / WMA files, 2 channel PCM will be output regardless of the “Dolby Digital” setting.  
If the connected device is not compatible with HDMI BITSTREAM, audio will be output as PCM even if you select  
“Stream” in “Dolby Digital” setting (Refer to page 101).  
• The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequency, the number of channels and bit  
length) maybe limited by the device that is connected.  
• Among the monitors that support HDMI, some do not support audio output (for example, projectors). In connections  
with device such as this unit, audio signals are not output from the HDMI output connector.  
• If the connected equipment is not compatible with HDMI BITSTREAM, DTS sound will not be output.  
2 Channel Analog Audio Connection  
AUDIO  
OUT  
analog audio  
stereo system  
input jacks  
AUDIO IN  
rear of this unit  
R
L
L
R
RCA audio cable  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1  
EN 25  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 25  
2009/04/03 15:37:13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INITIAL SETTING  
When you turn on this unit for the first time, you need to follow these steps after you have completed all the connections.  
Use [K / L] to select the desired  
channel preset type then press  
3
[ENTER].  
Initial Setting  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Channel Preset  
Make sure the antenna is  
connected to “ANTENNA IN” jack.  
CH  
Air  
Cable  
Cable (Extended Scan)  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Auto Preset will scan all terrestrial channels.  
This may take a while to complete.  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
The unit will start getting channels available in  
your area.  
Air:  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
(When using antenna)  
The channels broadcasted in TV and DTV are  
automatically scanned and memorized. Only the  
receivable channels in the area where this TV is  
used will be memorized.  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Cable:  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
(When using basic cable)  
The channels broadcasted in CATV are  
automatically scanned and memorized.  
Cable (Extended Scan):  
(When using basic cable)  
The channels broadcasted in analog CATV and  
digital CATV are automatically scanned and  
memorized.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
CH  
1
Auto Presetting Now  
If a PBS (public broadcasting station) is available  
in your area, clock setting will automatically be  
performed and the correct clock will be displayed  
following the channel preset procedure.  
SE-R0294  
Initial setting is then completed.  
Press [RETURN] to exit.  
Press [I/y ON/STANDBY].  
If a PBS (public broadcasting station) is not  
available in your area, press [ENTER]. Then  
proceed to step 5 in “Manual Clock Setting” on  
page 32.  
Before:  
1
2
Turn the TV on. Select the input to  
which the unit is connected.  
Use [K / L] to select your desired  
language, then press [ENTER] to set  
language.  
Initial Setting  
OSD Language  
English  
Français  
Español  
Select the language for Setup display.  
26 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 26  
2009/04/03 15:37:18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHANNEL SETTING  
If you have changed antenna connection, we recommend that you program available channels in your area with the  
following procedures.  
Auto Channel Scan  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
1
2
3
4
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “Channel”, then  
press [ENTER].  
“Channel” menu will appear.  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
Use [K / L] to select “Auto Channel  
Preset”, then press [ENTER].  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Use [K / L] to select the type of  
broadcasting signal, then press  
[ENTER].  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Auto Channel Preset  
Air  
Cable  
Cable (Extended Scan)  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
SKIP  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
The unit will start getting channels available in  
your area.  
Air:  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
(When using antenna)  
PAUSE  
VCR  
The channels broadcasted in analog TV and  
digital TV are automatically scanned and  
memorized. Only the receivable channels in the  
area will be memorized.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Cable:  
(When using basic cable)  
The channels broadcasted in analog CATV are  
automatically scanned and memorized.  
SE-R0294  
Cable (Extended Scan):  
(When using basic cable)  
The channels broadcasted in analog CATV and  
digital CATV are automatically scanned and  
memorized.  
To cancel the auto channel preset during  
scanning:  
Press [RETURN] to go back to the previous  
screen or [SETUP] to cancel.  
When scanning is over, press [SETUP]  
to exit.  
5
To cycle through only the memorized channels, use  
Note  
[CH  
/
].  
• If the auto channel preset is canceled during  
presetting, some channels not yet preset may not be  
received.  
To select a channel directly (including the ones not  
memorized), use [the Number buttons] and [-] (for  
digital TV channels).  
• The selection will depend on how you receive the TV  
channels.  
EN 27  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 27  
2009/04/03 15:37:20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHANNEL SETTING  
Adding/Deleting Channels  
You may want to add or delete TV channels if your  
channel lineup changes or if you no longer watch some  
channels.  
Adding channels is only available for the analog TV  
channels.  
Press [DTV/TV] to select the mode  
(DTV or TV) to/from which you want  
to add or delete channels.  
1
2
3
4
Make sure  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
• You perform “Auto Channel Scan” before adding or  
deleting the channels.  
Use [K / L] to select “Channel”, then  
press [ENTER].  
“Channel” menu will appear.  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “Manual Channel  
CH  
Preset”, then press [ENTER].  
“Manual Channel Preset” menu will appear.  
• If you are adding or deleting analog TV  
PQRS  
TUV  
channels, go to  
continue.  
on page 29 to  
TIMER  
PROG.  
ANALOG  
SPACE  
• If you are deleting digital TV channels, go to  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
on page 29 to continue.  
DIGITAL  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
28 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 28  
2009/04/03 15:37:22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHANNEL SETTING  
Adding/Deleting Channels (cont’d)  
ANALOG  
Select the channel number to add or  
delete.  
DIGITAL  
Select the channel number to delete.  
• Only the major channel is displayed in “Manual  
Channel Preset” menu. (The channel number  
displayed in the parenthesis is a virtual channel  
number)  
• Use [CH  
/
] to cycle through only the  
5
5
6
memorized channels.  
• Use [{ / B] to cycle through all the channels  
including the ones not memorized.  
• Use [the Number buttons] to select a channel  
directly.  
• When a memorized channel is selected, “Add”  
is checked and highlighted as a default.  
• When an unmemorized channel is selected,  
“Delete” is checked and highlighted as a  
default.  
• Use [CH  
/
] to cycle through only the  
memorized channels.  
• You cannot use [{ / B] for the digital TV  
channel selection.  
• Use [the Number buttons] to select a channel  
directly.  
• When an unmemorized channel is selected  
“Delete” is checked and highlighted as a  
default.  
Use [K / L] to select “Add” or  
“Delete”, then press [ENTER].  
Manual Channel Preset  
Use [K / L] to select “Delete”, then  
press [ENTER]. Then select the next  
channel to delete.  
• If the setting is complete, press [RETURN] to  
activate “Manual Channel Preset”.  
6
7
CH  
2
Add  
Delete  
Manual Channel Preset  
Your setting will be activated and it will  
automatically switch to the next channel so that  
you can continue adding or deleting channels.  
(
CH - - -  
)
DTV  
Add  
2
Delete  
Your setting will be activated.  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
WARNING:  
• For the digital TV channels, you cannot recover the  
deleted channels once they are deleted unless you  
perform the auto channel preset again.  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
7
EN 29  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 29  
2009/04/03 15:37:24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTING THE CLOCK  
Auto Clock Setting  
This unit can set the time and date automatically by  
referring to a channel that carries a clock information. If a  
PBS (public broadcasting station) is available in your area,  
follow “Auto Clock Setting” below. If not, follow “Manual  
Clock Setting” on page 32.  
ANALOG AUTO CLOCK SETTING  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
1
2
3
4
Make sure  
• The antenna/cable TV connections are correct.  
• Channels are set. (Refer to pages27-29.)  
Use [K / L] to select “Clock”, then  
press [ENTER].  
“Clock” menu will appear.  
Use [K / L] to select “Auto Clock  
Setting”, then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Use [K / L] to select “Auto”, then  
press [ENTER].  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Auto Clock Setting  
CH  
OFF  
Auto  
Manual  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
5
6
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Press [I/y ON/STANDBY] to turn off  
the unit.  
This unit will search for the time only when the  
power is off. Leave it off for at least 15 minutes  
to give this unit time to set the clock.  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Manual Auto Clock Setting  
If the unit chooses an incorrect PBS channel, set the PBS  
channel manually by following the steps below.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
Select “Manual” at step 4, then press  
[ENTER].  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
1
2
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Use [the Number buttons] or [K / L]  
to enter your PBS channel number,  
then press [ENTER].  
SE-R0294  
Set Channel No.  
CH  
1
Press [SETUP] to exit and turn off the  
unit.  
3
30 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 30  
2009/04/03 15:37:25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTING THE CLOCK  
Auto Clock Setting (cont’d)  
DIGITAL AUTO CLOCK SETTING  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
Note for auto clock setting  
• The unit receives the clock data at 12:00 a.m/p.m  
when the power is off.  
• The clock may set itself automatically after this unit  
receive the antenna/cable signal and plug in the  
power cord.  
• If the clock is not set correctly, timer recording does  
not work properly.  
• When analog broadcast ends, analog auto clock  
setting will no longer be available. Try digital auto  
clock setting in that case.  
• For digital auto clock setting, incorrect time may be  
obtained depending on the broadcast information.  
If this occurs, set the “Auto Clock Setting“ to “OFF” at  
step 4 and try “Manual Clock Setting“ on page 32.  
1
2
3
4
Use [K / L] to select “Clock”, then  
press [ENTER].  
“Clock” menu will appear.  
Use [K / L] to select “Auto Clock  
Setting”, then press [ENTER].  
Use [K / L] to select “Manual”, then  
press [ENTER].  
Time adjustment for each time zone  
Auto Clock Setting  
Atlantic  
Eastern  
Central  
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 4 hours  
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 5 hours  
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 6 hours  
OFF  
Auto  
Manual  
Mountain GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 7 hours  
Press [{ ] to highlight “CH”. Press  
Pacific  
Alaska  
Hawaii  
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 8 hours  
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 9 hours  
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time ) - 10 hours  
[K / L] to select “DTV”, then press  
5
[
B] .  
Set Channel No.  
DTV  
1
Use [the Number buttons] or [K / L]  
to enter the desired major channel  
number to refer, then press [ENTER].  
6
7
Use [K / L] to select the desired time  
zone, then press [ENTER].  
Time Zone  
Atlantic  
Eastern  
Central  
Mountain  
Pacific  
Alaska  
Hawaii  
Press [SETUP] to exit and turn off the  
unit.  
This unit will search for the time only when the  
power is off. Leave it off for at least 15 minutes  
to give this unit time to set the clock.  
8
EN 31  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 31  
2009/04/03 15:37:27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTING THE CLOCK  
Manual Clock Setting  
Daylight Saving Time  
When “Daylight Saving Time” is “ON”, the unit clock will  
automatically adjust the time in order to fit the daylight  
saving time.  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
“ON (MAR - NOV)” has been selected as the default.  
1
Use [K / L] to select “Clock”, then  
press [ENTER].  
“Clock” menu will appear.  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Use [K / L] to select “Clock Setting”,  
then press [ENTER].  
Use [K / L] to select “Clock”, then  
press [ENTER].  
“Clock” menu will appear.  
Use [K / L] to select calendar or time,  
then press [ENTER].  
Use [K / L] to select “Daylight Saving  
Time”, then press [ENTER].  
Clock Setting  
JAN / 01 / 2009 ( THU)  
12 : 00 AM  
Use [K / L] to select “ON (MAR -  
NOV)”, “ON (APR - OCT)” or “OFF”,  
then press [ENTER].  
Use [{ / B] to select an item to set,  
and use [K / L] to select the contents  
to suit your preference, then press  
[ENTER].  
Daylight Saving Time  
5
ON (MAR - NOV)  
ON (APR - OCT)  
OFF  
Clock Setting  
ON (MAR - NOV):  
JAN / 01 / 2009 ( THU )  
12 : 00 AM  
Move forward one hour on the second Sunday in  
March and move back one hour on the first  
Sunday in November.  
Your setting will be activated.  
The clock start counting when you press  
[ENTER].  
ON (APR - OCT):  
Move forward one hour on the first Sunday in  
April and move back one hour on the last  
Sunday in October.  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
6
5
Note  
• Your clock setting will be lost if either there is a power  
failure or this unit has been unplugged for more than  
30 seconds when you set the clock manually.  
• For setting the day, year, hour and minute,  
[the Number buttons] can also be used.  
• You can set the built-in calendar from the year 2008  
up to 2058.  
32 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 32  
2009/04/03 15:37:28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNER SETTINGS  
Switching Analog Mode /  
Channel Selection  
Digital Mode  
Select channels by using [CH  
buttons] on remote control.  
/
] or [the Number  
You can easily switch the analog TV (NTSC) and digital TV  
(ATSC) with the remote control.  
[CH  
Use [CH  
/
]
/
] to change the channel.  
Press [DTV/TV] on the remote control.  
[the Number buttons]  
• The analog mode and digital mode switch alternately.  
Press the channel number with [the Number buttons] to  
select a channel you want to watch.  
<Analog TV channels>  
Enter the channel number with [the Number buttons] to  
select a channel you want to watch.  
For 1-digit number  
Note  
• When you switch the analog mode to the digital  
mode, it may take awhile until the digital channel  
selection is completed. The following screen is  
displayed while switching the mode.  
e.g.) 2 ch:  
[0] + [2], [2] + [-] or  
[2] + leave it for 2 seconds.  
For 2-digit number  
DTV 2-1  
e.g.) 25ch:  
[2] + [5]  
<Digital TV channels>  
Now Scanning  
Enter the major and minor channel number with [the  
Number buttons] to select a channel you want to watch.  
For 1-digit number  
e.g.) 2-2 ch:  
major channel  
minor channel  
[0] + [2] or [2] + [-]  
[0] + [2], [2] + [-] or  
[2] + leave it for 2 seconds.  
For 2-digit number  
e.g.) 35-16ch:  
major channel  
minor channel  
[3] + [5]  
[1] + [6]  
• If you enter 1 digit for major channel and leave it for 2  
seconds, the number will be taken as the major channel  
and lowest minor channel of the major channel will be  
displayed.  
• If there is no minor channel input, lowest minor channel  
of the major channel will be displayed.  
Note  
• In digital TV broadcasting, 2 or more channels, called  
minor channels, are simultaneously broadcast on one  
main channel, called major channel.  
About minor-channel broadcasting:  
There may be different programs being broadcast on  
minor channels through a single channel from ATSC. You  
can watch each minor channel program being broadcast  
by selecting one of the minor channels.  
NTSC  
ATSC  
18:00  
18:30  
19:00  
19:30  
20:00  
Smallest Smallest  
CH  
DTV4-1  
CH  
DTV4-1 DTV4-2 DTV4-3  
CH4  
Smallest  
CH  
DTV4-1  
DTV4-3  
Smallest  
CH  
DTV4-1 DTV4-2  
: change automatically  
: change manually by using [CH  
/
]
EN 33  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 33  
2009/04/03 15:37:29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNER SETTINGS  
This section describes how to switch the TV audio.  
When you record a TV program, only output sound channel will be recorded.  
Selecting TV Audio  
Digital TV  
Press [AUDIO ] to cycle through  
available audio languages.  
English 1/2  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
1
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
• When you press [AUDIO ], selected  
language will be displayed on the TV screen.  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
• Every time you press [AUDIO ], the language  
will be switched.  
e.g.) English 1/3 → Spanish 2/3 → Other 3/3  
• Available languages differ depending on the  
broadcast.  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
• The information display will automatically  
disappear.  
• When you record digital TV broadcasting, the  
audio language you have selected will be  
recorded.  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
Note  
• The timer recording for digital TV cannot record any  
audio language other than default audio.  
• [AUDIO ] does not control external device audio.  
• When there is only one audio channel on the  
broadcast, pressing [AUDIO ] does not display  
anything.  
34 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 34  
2009/04/03 15:37:30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNER SETTINGS  
Selecting TV Audio (cont’d)  
Analog TV  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
1
2
3
4
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Use [K / L] to select “Channel”, then  
press [ENTER].  
“Channel” menu will appear.  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
Use [K / L] to select “TV Audio  
Select”, then press [ENTER].  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Use [K / L] to select “Stereo” or  
“SAP”, then press [ENTER].  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
TV Audio Select  
Stereo  
SAP  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Stereo:  
Outputs main-audio.  
SAP (secondary audio program):  
Outputs sub-audio.  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
SKIP  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
5
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
Note on recording analog TV channel audio  
• When you record an analog TV program available in  
second audio or stereo, you have to select either  
“Stereo” or “SAP” in “Channel” menu beforehand.  
Refer to the following table to check an appropriate  
setting.  
Selected  
audio  
Broadcast  
audio  
Disc  
Audio  
recording  
output  
Stereo  
STEREO+SAP  
STEREO  
STEREO  
STEREO  
MONO  
MONO  
SAP  
STEREO  
STEREO  
MONO  
MONO  
SAP  
MONO+SAP  
MONO  
SAP  
STEREO+SAP  
STEREO  
STEREO  
SAP  
STEREO  
SAP  
MONO+SAP  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
EN 35  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 35  
2009/04/03 15:37:32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNER SETTINGS  
DTV Closed Caption  
Digital TV  
Apart from closed captions, Digital TV has its own closed captions called DTV CC. Use this menu to change the settings  
for DTV CC.  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
1
2
3
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “Display”, then  
press [ENTER].  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
Use [K / L] to select “DTV CC”, then  
press [ENTER].  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
OSD Language  
Screen Saver  
FL Dimmer  
DTV CC  
CC Style  
V-Chip  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
Use [K / L] to select “Caption Service”,  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
then press [ENTER].  
4
5
DTV CC  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Caption Service  
Recording  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Use [K / L] to the desired DTV closed  
caption, then press [ENTER].  
Caption Service  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
OFF  
Service1  
Service2  
Service3  
Service4  
Service5  
Service6  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
OFF:  
Select if you do not want DTV CC. This is the  
default.  
Service 1 to Service 6:  
Select one of these before changing any other  
item in the closed caption menu. Choose  
“Service 1” under normal circumstances.  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
6
36 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 36  
2009/04/03 15:37:33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNER SETTINGS  
Closed Caption Style  
Digital TV  
Digital TV can also change the style of its closed caption such as font, color or size, etc.  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
1
2
3
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “Display”, then  
press [ENTER].  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
Use [K / L] to select “CC Style”, then  
press [ENTER].  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
OSD Language  
Screen Saver  
FL Dimmer  
DTV CC  
CC Style  
V-Chip  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
Use [K / L] to select “User Setting”,  
then press [ENTER].  
CC Style  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
4
5
SKIP  
PLAY  
User Setting  
Font Size  
Font Style  
Font Opacity  
Font Color  
Edge Type  
Edge Color  
Back Opacity  
Back Color  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Use [K / L] to select “ON”, then press  
[ENTER].  
User Setting  
SE-R0294  
ON  
OFF  
Instructions continue on the next page.  
EN 37  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 37  
2009/04/03 15:37:34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNER SETTINGS  
Closed Caption Style (cont’d)  
Digital TV  
<Edge Type>  
Edge type of the displayed caption can be  
switched as below.  
Use [K / L] to select the item and  
switch the setting for each item you  
want to set, then press [ENTER].  
• When “User Setting” is set to “ON”, you can set  
the following items. CC style set by “User  
Setting” will be displayed.  
• The setting description for each item is shown  
below.  
6
Edge Type  
None  
Raised  
Depressed  
Uniform  
L.Shadow  
R.Shadow  
<Font Size>  
<Edge Color>  
Font size of the displayed caption can be  
switched as below.  
Edge color of the displayed caption can be  
switched as below.  
Font Size  
Edge Color  
Large  
Middle  
Small  
White  
Black  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
<Font Style>  
Font style of the displayed caption can be  
switched as below.  
FontStyle  
<Back Opacity>  
Background opacity of the displayed caption can  
be switched as below.  
Style1  
Style2  
Style3  
Style4  
Style5  
Style6  
Style7  
Style8  
Back Opacity  
Solid  
Transparent  
Translucent  
Flash  
<Font Opacity>  
<Back Color>  
Background color of the displayed caption can  
be switched as below.  
Font opacity of the displayed caption can be  
switched as below.  
Font Opacity  
Back Color  
Solid  
Transparent  
Translucent  
Flash  
White  
Black  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
<Font Color>  
Font color of the displayed caption can be  
switched as below.  
Font Color  
White  
Black  
Red  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
7
38 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 38  
2009/04/03 15:37:36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FORMATTING A DISC  
Choosing the Recording Format of a Brand-New DVD-RW  
When inserting a brand-new DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the unit automatically starts to initialize the disc. DVD+RW will  
always be formatted in +VR mode, and DVD-RW will be formatted either video or VR mode according to the recording  
format mode setting of the unit. Before insert a brand-new DVD-RW, you need to set the recording format to the  
desired mode. You can also manually format a DVD-RW once it has been used.  
Press [SETUP].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
1
2
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,  
then press [ENTER].  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
Setup  
General Setting  
Timer Programming  
Title List  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
DVD Menu  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Use [K / L] to select “Format”, then  
press [ENTER].  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
3
4
DVD Menu  
Format  
Finalize  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Use [K / L] to select “Format Mode”,  
then press [ENTER].  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
DVD Menu  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Format  
Finalize  
Start  
Format Mode  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
Use [K / L] to select “Video mode” or  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
“VR mode”, then press [ENTER].  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
5
6
7
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
SE-R0294  
Insert a brand-new disc.  
Formatting will start.  
Formatting  
90%  
Note  
• The recording format setting is effective only for  
DVD-RW. You cannot change the recording format  
for a DVD-R and DVD+RW/+R.  
Formatting is completed.  
“100%” is indicated.  
• You cannot mix two formats on one DVD-RW disc. If  
you insert a disc that has been formatted before, the  
recording format is not changed if you select another  
format in the “Setup” menu only. To reformat a disc  
(change disc format type), refer to “Reformatting a  
Disc Manually” on page 40.  
8
EN 39  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 39  
2009/04/03 15:37:38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FORMATTING A DISC  
Reformatting a Disc Manually  
If you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, you can format the disc by performing “Format”. You can format DVD-RW for  
either video mode recording or VR mode recording. DVD+RW can be format in order to erase all content of the disc.  
Insert a recordable disc.  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
Press [SETUP].  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
1
2
CH  
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,  
then press [ENTER].  
PQRS  
TUV  
Setup  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
General Setting  
Timer Programming  
Title List  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DVD Menu  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Use [K / L] to select “Format”, then  
press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW  
ENTER  
3
4
CLEAR  
RETURN  
DVD Menu  
Format  
Finalize  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
Disc Protect OFF  
ON  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Delete All Playlists  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Use [K / L] to select “Start”, then  
press [ENTER].  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
DVD Menu  
PAUSE  
VCR  
Format  
Finalize  
Start  
Disc Protect OFF  
Delete All Playlists  
ON  
Format Mode  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Selection menu will appear and prompt you to  
confirm.  
• For DVD+RW, use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then  
press [ENTER].  
SE-R0294  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
Formatting will start.  
If you want to cancel formatting, select “No”.  
5
6
Are you sure?  
Yes  
No  
Note  
Formatting is completed.  
“100%” is indicated.  
• When you reformat the disc, the contents of the disc  
are erased.  
• For DVD-RW, make sure that the recording format is  
set to the desired mode. (See steps 1 to 6 in  
“Choosing the Recording Format of a Brand-New  
DVD-RW” on page 39.)  
• This unit may not be able to reformat a disc that is  
not previously formatted by this unit (e.g. DVD disc  
formatted by PC or another recorder).  
Formatting  
100%  
40 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 40  
2009/04/03 15:37:40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTING A DISC TO PROTECT  
To prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing the  
titles, you can protect them from “DVD Menu” menu.  
Press [SETUP].  
1
2
3
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,  
then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “Disc Protect  
OFF ON”, then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
DVD Menu  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect OFF  
ON  
Delete All Playlists  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
4
Protect this disc?  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Yes  
No  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
A disc will be protected.  
PAUSE  
VCR  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
Note  
To cancel the disc protect:  
• When you insert a disc protected with this unit,  
“Disc Protect ON OFF” will appear instead of “OFF  
ON”.  
DVD Menu  
Format  
Finalize  
Disc Protect ON  
OFF  
Delete All Playlists  
To release the protection for the disc, select “Disc  
Protect ON OFF” at step 3, then follow rest of the  
procedures.  
EN 41  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 41  
2009/04/03 15:37:42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS  
Auto Finalizing  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
“General Setting” menu will appear.  
You can finalize discs automatically using this function.  
You can use this function to finalize discs after finishing  
all timer recordings and at the end of the disc space.  
1
Use [K / L] to select “Recording”,  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
then press [ENTER].  
“Recording” menu will appear.  
2
3
4
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
Use [K / L] to select “Auto Finalize”,  
then press [ENTER].  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Use [K / L] to select “Disc Full” or  
“End of Timer Rec”, then press  
[ENTER].  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Auto Finalize  
Disc Full  
End of Timer Rec  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
Use [K / L] to select “ON”, then press  
[ENTER].  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
5
Disc Full  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
ON  
OFF  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
End of Timer Rec  
ON  
OFF  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Your setting will be activated.  
SE-R0294  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
6
Note  
• This function is not available after finishing daily or  
weekly program recording.  
42 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 42  
2009/04/03 15:37:45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS  
Finalizing a Disc  
Press [SETUP].  
You will need to finalize discs to play back on other DVD  
players.  
Finalizing may take several minutes up to an hour.  
Since the process of the finalization fills empty space of  
the disc, a shorter recording period on the disc will  
require a longer time period for finalization. Do not  
unplug the power cord during finalization.  
1
2
3
4
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,  
then press [ENTER].  
“DVD Menu“ menu will appear.  
Use [K / L] to select “Finalize”, then  
press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
Finalize disc?  
PQRS  
TUV  
Yes  
No  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Finalizing will start.  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Finalizing  
90%  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Finalizing is completed.  
PAUSE  
VCR  
5
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
EN 43  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 43  
2009/04/03 15:37:47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PLAYING THE DISCS IN OTHER DVD PLAYERS  
Finalizing a Disc (cont’d)  
To cancel finalizing...  
(DVD-RW only)  
Press [STOP C] during the finalizing is in progress. Use  
[K / L] to select “Yes”, then press [ENTER]. Finalizing is  
canceled and the unit switches to stop mode.  
Note  
• Finalizing a disc in video mode and +VR mode  
automatically creates a title menu.  
• After you finalize the DVD+RW, you can call up the  
title list by pressing [TOP MENU], or you can call up  
the title menu by pressing [DISC MENU].  
• Even after DVD+RW is finalized, you can still record  
or edit. After you finalize DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, you  
cannot edit or record anything else on that disc.  
Do you want to cancel ?  
Yes  
No  
• If you insert a DVD-RW finalized with this unit, “Undo  
Finalization” will appear instead of “Finalize” at  
step 3.  
• To release the finalization of the DVD-RW disc, select  
“Undo Finalization” at step 3.  
Finalizing  
5%  
If “ ” appears when [STOP C] is pressed, you cannot  
cancel finalizing because the finalizing has already  
reached at a critical point in its process.  
If “No” is selected and [ENTER] or [RETURN] is pressed,  
finalizing is continued.  
DVD Menu  
Format  
Undo Finalization  
Disc Protect OFF  
Delete All Playlists  
ON  
You cannot cancel finalizing a DVD-R, DVD+R and  
DVD+RW once it has started.  
• To undo the finalization of the DVD+RW, make an  
additional recording onto the disc.  
• DO NOT power off during finalizing. This may result  
in a malfunction.  
• For DVD+RW, if you have added or deleted chapters,  
or made chapters hidden, you must finalize the disc  
before being able to see those effects on other units.  
To play back discs other than DVD+RW on other DVD  
players, you will need to finalize.  
44 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 44  
2009/04/03 15:37:49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INFORMATION ON DVD RECORDING  
Recording Mode  
Restrictions on Recording  
You can select a recording mode among 5 options, and  
the recording time will depend on the recording mode  
you select as follows.  
You cannot record copy-protected program using this  
unit. Copy-protected video signal is included in DVD-  
videos, some satellite broadcasts, some pay-per-view  
stations and some “premium” stations.  
If copy-protected material is detected, recording will  
pause or stop automatically and an error message  
appears on the screen.  
Recording time  
12cm 8cm  
Video/  
Sound Quality  
Recording mode  
XP  
SP  
60 min 18 min  
120 min 36 min  
240 min 72 min  
360 min 108 min  
480 min 144 min  
“Copy-once only” video can only be recorded to CPRM  
compatible DVD-RW formatted in VR mode.  
LP  
What is “CPRM”?  
EP  
CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system  
regarding the recording of “copy-once” broadcast  
programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for  
Recordable Media.  
This unit is CPRM compatible, which means that you can  
record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot  
make another copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings  
can only be made on CPRM compatible DVD-RW format-  
ted in VR mode, and CPRM recordings can only be played  
back on DVD players that are specifically compatible with  
CPRM.  
SLP  
• The recording times listed above are estimates and are  
for reference purposes only. Actual recording times may  
vary.  
• The audio and video quality of content being recorded  
may differ depending on the recording mode/recording  
time chosen.  
Note  
Making discs playable in other DVD players (Finalize)  
For DVD-RW/-R, it is necessary to finalize the disc after  
recording, in order to play back the disc on other  
DVD players. (Refer to pages 42-44.) For DVD+RW/+R, it is  
recommended to finalize the disc in order to make the  
disc more compatible to other DVD player. When video  
and +VR mode disc are finalized, a title menu is created.  
You cannot finalize discs in other DVD recorders.  
• This unit cannot record to CD-RW or CD-R.  
• All high definition pictures will be down converted to  
the standard definition pictures when they are  
recorded on this unit.  
• DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R and CD-RW/-R recorded on  
a personal computer or a DVD or CD recorder may  
not be played back if the disc is damaged or dirty or  
if there is condensation on the player’s lens.  
• If you record a disc using a personal computer, even  
if it is recorded in a compatible format it may not be  
played back because of the settings of the  
application software used to create the disc. (Check  
with the software publisher for more detailed  
information.)  
• Discs recorded in video mode on this unit cannot  
record additional information using other DVD  
recorders.  
• Since the recording is made by the VBR (variable bit  
rate) method, depending on the picture you are  
recording, the actual remaining time for recording  
may be a little shorter than the remaining time  
displayed on the TV screen.  
EN 45  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 45  
2009/04/03 15:37:50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING  
Make Recording Compatible  
Setting for Auto Chapter  
Use this feature to make the discs recorded on other unit  
recordable on this unit. When you make an additional  
recording on this unit with “Make Recording Compatible”  
set to “ON”, the title list is automatically converted to our  
style.  
You can set a specified time for chapter marks.  
1) Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to select “General  
Setting”, then press [ENTER].  
2) Use [K / L] to select “Recording”, then press [ENTER].  
“Recording” menu will appear.  
1) Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to select “General  
Setting”, then press [ENTER].  
3) Use [K / L] to select “Auto Chapter”, then press  
[ENTER].  
2) Use [K / L] to select “Recording”, then press  
[ENTER].  
“Recording” menu will appear.  
4) Use [K / L] to select a desired time option, then  
press [ENTER].  
3) Use [K / L] to select “Make Recording Compatible”,  
Auto Chapter  
then press [ENTER].  
OFF  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
4) Use [K / L] to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press  
[ENTER].  
Make Recording Compatible  
ON  
OFF  
5) Press [SETUP] to exit.  
ON:  
Title list will be replaced when you make  
additional recordings to the discs recorded by  
other units.  
Note  
• The interval for auto chapter may be up to two  
minutes different from the time option you set.  
OFF: Prohibiting additional record to the disc that  
has a title list created by other units.  
• A blank chapter may be created depending on the  
remaining time of the disc.  
5) Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• This function is also available for unfinalized DVD+R.  
Recording the DTV Closed Caption  
You can record the DTV Closed Caption as the part of the  
image for the recording program and see the recorded  
closed caption even with the TV that is not closed caption  
compliant.  
1) Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to select “General  
Setting”, then press [ENTER].  
2) Use [K / L] to select “Display”, then press [ENTER].  
3) Use [K / L] to select “DTV CC”, then press [ENTER].  
4) Use [K / L] to select “Recording”, then press [ENTER].  
• If the “Caption Service” is set to “OFF”, you cannot  
select “Recording”.  
5) Use [K / L] to select “ON”, then press [ENTER].  
Recording  
ON  
OFF  
6) Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• If the “Caption Service” is set to “OFF”, the caption  
will not be recorded.  
46 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 46  
2009/04/03 15:37:52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTINGS FOR A RECORDING  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
Setting Aspect Ratio for Video Mode  
Recording  
You can enjoy high quality sound recording. This function  
works only when the recording mode is set at XP.  
You can set aspect ratio for video mode recording.  
1) Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to select “General  
Setting”, then press [ENTER].  
1) Follow step 1 to 2 on “Recording Audio Select (XP)”.  
2) Use [K / L] to select “Aspect Ratio (Video mode)”,  
then press [ENTER].  
2) Use [K / L] to select “Recording”, then press  
[ENTER].  
“Recording” menu will appear.  
3) Use [K / L] to select your desired setting, then press  
[ENTER].  
3) Use [K / L] to select “Recording Audio Select (XP)”,  
Aspect Ratio (Video mode)  
then press [ENTER].  
Auto  
4 : 3  
16 : 9  
4) Use [K / L] to select “PCM” or “Dolby Digital”, then  
press [ENTER].  
Auto (default): It will be recorded with whichever the  
ratio that the program you started to record are  
broadcasted with.  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
PCM  
Dolby Digital  
4:3 : Recorded in the aspect ratio of 4:3.  
16:9 : Recorded in the aspect ratio of 16:9.  
PCM:  
Records PCM audio for the best quality sound.  
Dolby Digital:  
4) Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Records Dolby Digital audio for good quality sound.  
Note  
• For DVD-RW VR mode, the image will be recorded in  
whichever the ratio that the program you record are  
broadcasted with, regardless of the “Aspect Ratio  
(Video mode)” setting.  
• For DVD+RW/+R, the image will always be recorded  
in aspect ratio of 4:3.  
5) Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Note  
• “PCM” stands for Pulse Code Modulation. It changes  
analog sound to digital sound without compressing  
audio data.  
• When the recording mode is set at other than XP, the  
unit records “Dolby Digital” audio automatically even  
if you selected “PCM”.  
EN 47  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 47  
2009/04/03 15:37:55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING  
Follow the steps to record TV programs.  
Press [I/y ON/STANDBY].  
Turn on the TV and be sure to select the input to  
which the unit is connected.  
1
2
Press [DVD].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
HDMI  
CLOSE SELECT  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the  
disc tray and insert your disc with its  
label facing up.  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Align the disc to  
the disc tray guide.  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the  
ENTER  
disc tray.  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
3
4
It may take awhile to load  
the disc completely.  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
• When inserting a brand-new DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW, the unit automatically starts to  
format.  
• If titles have been recorded on the disc, the  
title list is displayed. Press [STOP C] to exit the  
title list.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
Press [REC MODE] repeatedly to  
select a recording mode.  
Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 45.  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
SP  
1:53  
Press [DTV/TV] to select analog TV or  
digital TV, then use [CH ] or  
/
5
[the Number buttons] and [-] (for  
digital TV channels) to select a  
desired channel to record.  
Refer to “Switching Analog Mode/Digital Mode”  
and “Channel Selection“ on page 33.  
CH 12  
48 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 48  
2009/04/03 15:37:56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC RECORDING & ONE-TOUCH TIMER RECORDING  
Press [REC I] to start recording.  
“I” will be displayed for 5 seconds.  
Press [STOP C] to stop recording.  
The recorded title will be included in the title list.  
(Refer to “Guide to a Title List” on page 81.)  
6
7
SP  
1:53  
I
Wait for a moment  
90%  
Press [PAUSE F] to pause recording.  
Press [PAUSE F]] or [REC I] again to restart  
recording.  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
To set one-touch timer recording (OTR)...  
This is a simple way to set the recording time in blocks  
of 30 minutes.  
Press [REC I] repeatedly until the desired recording  
time (30 minutes to 8 hours) appears on the TV screen.  
One-touch timer recording will start.  
I
0:30  
0:30  
(normal recording)  
1:00  
8:00  
7:30  
• To change the recording length during one-touch  
timer recording, press [REC I] repeatedly until the  
desired length appears.  
• To cancel one-touch timer recording within the  
specified time, press [STOP C].  
Note  
• When you press [REC I], recording starts immediately and continues until the disc is full or you stop recording.  
• When the unit clock has not been set, the space for a date and time of title names will be blank.  
• When you record a TV program onto DVD-RW, DVD-R or DVD+RW/+R, you have to select the TV channel audio  
beforehand. Only the selected channel audio will be recorded. Refer to “Selecting TV Audio” on pages 34-35 for more  
details.  
• You cannot change the recording mode during the recording pause mode.  
• You can change a channel to be recorded during the recording pause mode.  
Note for one-touch timer recording  
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on the front panel display during one-touch timer recording. Press  
[DISPLAY] to see it on the TV screen.  
• Unlike the timer recording, you can perform the following operations during one-touch timer recording.  
- Turning the unit into the standby mode (One-touch timer recording will be canceled.).  
- Using [REC I] or [STOP C] on the remote control.  
• You cannot use the pause function during one-touch timer recording.  
• If DVD one-touch timer recording is completed during VCR playback or recording, the DVD will be in stop mode  
and the VCR keeps the current mode.  
• When one-touch timer recording is finished and the power is turned into the standby mode, the unit will switch to  
the timer-standby mode automatically if a timer recording has been programmed. Press [TIMER SET] to cancel  
the timer-standby mode to use the unit continuously.  
EN 49  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 49  
2009/04/03 15:38:01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TIMER RECORDING  
Guide to Timer Programming Display  
You can program the unit to record up to 12 programs  
within a month in advance. Daily or weekly program  
recordings are also available.  
Before recording, make sure  
• Set the clock before setting a timer programming.  
3
1
2
Timer Programming  
JAN/ 2/09 1:00 AM 125-01 SP  
SP (1:00) THU JAN/01 10:00AM  
Date End CH  
Start  
JAN/02  
1:00AM 2:00AM DTV 125- 1  
New Program  
• Insert a recordable disc with enough recordable space or  
a cassette tape with an erase-protection tab.  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
1/1  
CH  
4
5
PQRS  
TUV  
1. Title of a Timer Program (Contains date, time, channel,  
recording mode of the program)  
2. Current date and time  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
3. Recording mode and length of the recording  
4. Timer program list  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
5. Total number of pages and current page (2 pages maximum)  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Press [TIMER PROG.].  
1
2
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Use [K / L] to select “New Program”,  
then press [ENTER].  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Timer Programming  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
THU JAN/01 10:00AM  
Date  
Start  
End  
CH  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
New Program  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
1/1  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
• If there are 6 or more programs, use  
[SKIP j / i] to change pages.  
Note  
Use [K / L] to enter the date, then  
press [B].  
• If you have not set the clock yet:  
“Manual Clock Setting” menu will appear instead of  
the timer programming list at step 1. Continue with  
the step 4 in “Manual Clock Setting” on page 32 before  
setting a timer programming.  
Use [s / B] to move the cursor to the left and the  
right in “Timer Programming” menu.  
If a basic recording or one-touch timer recording is in  
progress on one component (e.g., VCR) and the timer  
recording set for the other component (e.g., DVD) is about  
to begin, the unit automatically switches to the  
3
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
- - : - -  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
- - : - -  
Mode  
SP  
•
•
DTV125- 1  
SP  
2 : 00  
JAN/01  
Daily  
When pressing [L] at  
the current date, the  
date will change as  
follows.  
programmed channel for timer recording 2 minutes before  
the programmed starting time, and the recording in  
progress (for VCR) will be canceled UNLESS their recording  
channels are the same. If their recording channels are the  
same, the timer recording will start without canceling the  
recording currently in progress. In this case, the recording  
of the same channel will be made on both DVD and VCR.  
MON-SAT  
MON-FRI  
SAT  
e.g.) January 1st  
FRI  
•
•
You cannot make a program whose recording time  
exceeds 12 hours.  
SUN  
Cancel the timer-standby mode by pressing [TIMER  
SET] before operation for either DVD or VCR. When  
finished operating, press [TIMER SET] to resume the  
timer-standby mode.  
JAN/31  
•
In the timer-standby mode, you can turn on the  
power and use the component (VCR or DVD) which is  
not currently timer-programmed.  
50 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 50  
2009/04/03 15:38:01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TIMER RECORDING  
Use [K / L] to select a recording  
mode.  
Use [K / L / { / B] or [the Number  
buttons] to enter the start and end  
time, then press [B].  
7
4
5
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
2 : 00AM  
Mode  
SP  
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
- - : - -  
Mode  
SP  
DTV125- 1  
SP  
1 : 00  
DTV125- 1  
Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 45 for DVD or  
“Recording” on page 111 for VCR.  
• You can check the remaining recordable space  
of the disc when you select the recording  
mode.  
SP  
2 : 00  
• You cannot make a program which recording  
time exceeds 12 hours.  
Use [K / L] to select analog (“- - -”) /  
digital (“DTV”) mode or external  
input (L1 / L2), then press [B].  
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
2 : 00AM  
Mode  
SP  
DTV125- 1  
SP  
1 : 00  
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
2 : 00AM  
Mode  
SP  
Auto recording mode select (DVD only) ...  
L1  
When “Auto” is selected as a recording mode, the unit  
calculates how much time is available on the disc and  
determines the appropriate recording mode to  
complete recording the program.  
SP  
1 : 00  
To record from external input (e.g., cable/  
satellite box), select L1 or L2.  
Use [K / L] to select the channel number to  
record.  
For digital mode, select both major and minor  
channels. Refer to “How to select a channel  
number for the timer recording” on page 52 for  
more details.  
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
2 : 00AM  
Mode  
DTV125- 1  
Auto  
Auto  
1 : 00  
• “Auto” is only available for one program in the timer  
program list.  
e.g.) analog mode  
• The recording may be cut short, when the available  
recording space of the disc is too limited.  
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
2 : 00AM  
Mode  
SP  
10  
SP  
1 : 00  
Press [ENTER] when all items are  
entered.  
e.g.) digital mode  
After displaying an instructive message for 10  
8
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
2 : 00AM  
Mode  
SP  
seconds, timer program list will appear.  
PressTIMER SET toTimer standby mode.  
WhenTimer Set on DVD or VCR,  
it is not available in the standby mode.  
PressTIMER SET to cancel the standby mode.  
DTV125- 1  
SP  
1 : 00  
Use [K / L] to select a recording media  
(“DVD” or “VCR”), then press [B].  
Timer Programming  
6
JAN/ 2/09 1:00 AM 125-01 SP  
SP (1:00)  
Date  
JAN/02  
THU JAN/01 11:00AM  
End CH  
12:00AM 1:00AM DTV125-1  
Date  
JAN/02  
CH  
Start  
1 : 00AM  
REC To  
DVD  
End  
2 : 00AM  
Mode  
SP  
Start  
DTV125- 1  
SP  
1 : 00  
Your program setting will be stored.  
• To set another program, repeat steps 2 to 7.  
• To exit, press [TIMER PROG.] or [SETUP].  
• When 2 or more programs are overlapped,  
“Timer program overlapped” appears, and the  
overlapped program will be displayed in blue.  
To correct the timer program refer to  
“Checking, canceling, or correcting the timer  
programming information” on page 53.  
Instructions continue on the next page.  
EN 51  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 51  
2009/04/03 15:38:05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TIMER RECORDING  
Press [TIMER SET] to set a timer  
programming.  
will appear on the front panel display, while this  
unit waits to make the recording.  
9
CS  
DR  
CD  
HDD  
DVD  
“VCR” will appear on the front panel display if VCR  
timer recording have been set.  
How to select a channel number for the timer recording  
Analog TV  
For channel number 2-6, press [B] or [ – ] to decide the channels. For other channels (7-69), the  
channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.  
Analog CATV  
Digital TV  
For channel number 1-12, press [B] or [ – ] to decide the channels. For other channels (13-125),  
the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.  
For major channel number 1-9, press [B] or [ – ] after selecting the number with [K / L]. For the  
other channels (10-99), the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.  
Digital CATV  
minor channels  
For major channel number 1-13, press [B] or [ – ] after selecting the number with [K / L]. For the  
other channels (14-135), the channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.  
For channel number 1-9, press [B] or [ – ] to decide the channels. For other channels (10-99), the  
channel will be decided as soon as you enter the channel number.  
<Hint>  
• You can decide the 1-digit channel number by pressing 0 first , then enter desired 1-digit channel number.  
e.g.) “5”: [0]+[5]  
• For selecting the channels with [K / L], you need to press [B] or [ – ] to decide the channel number.  
• For selecting the minor channels with [K / L], please make sure the minor channel you are selecting is existing.  
[K / L] does not skip the non-existed minor channels.  
52 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 52  
2009/04/03 15:38:07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TIMER RECORDING  
To stop the timer recording in progress  
If the timer program did not complete correctly,  
the error number appears in the timer  
programming list.  
1) Press [STOP C ] on the remote control.  
2) Confirmation message will appear. Select “Yes”,  
then press [ENTER].  
• To stop the timer recording immediately, press  
[STOP C] on the unit.  
Timer Programming  
THU JAN/01 10:00AM  
Date  
E40 JAN/02  
Start  
End  
CH  
Checking, canceling, or correcting the timer  
programming information  
1:00AM 2:00AM DTV125- 1  
New Program  
1) Press [TIMER SET].  
1/1  
2) Press [TIMER PROG.].  
Each error number means:  
3) Check the information on the list you want to edit.  
E1-22 Recording error other E40  
E37-39 than below  
Some portion has  
not been recorded  
because of program  
overlapping.  
Timer Programming  
JAN/ 2/09 1:00 AM 125-01 SP  
E23-24 Unrecordable disc  
SP (1:00)  
Date  
JAN/02  
THU JAN/01 10:00AM  
Recording did not  
start at the start time.  
Start  
End CH  
1:00AM 2:00AM DTV125- 1  
New Program  
E25-28 Copy prohibited program  
E29  
E30  
Disc protected  
Disc full  
E41  
E42  
E43  
Power failed  
No disc when recording  
E31-32 Already 99 titles  
recorded  
Already 49 titles  
recorded  
1/1  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
Already 999 chapters E44  
recorded  
Already 254 chapters  
recorded  
4-A) To delete the timer program:  
1 Use [K / L] to select the program you want to  
delete, then press [ENTER].  
2 Use [K / L] to select “Delete”, then press  
[ENTER].  
No space for Control E45  
information  
Copy prohibited  
program  
PCA full *1  
E46  
It is impossible to  
record additionally  
on a disc recorded  
by other units  
Selection menu will appear.  
3 Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press [ENTER].  
4-B) To correct the timer program:  
Already finalized  
video format disc  
when setting  
“Make Recording  
Compatible” to “OFF”.  
1 Use [K / L] to select the program you want to  
correct, then press [ENTER].  
• A program with the error number is grayed in the timer  
programming list.  
2 Use [K / L] to select “Program Change”, then  
press [ENTER].  
• Once the timer programming list with error line(s) is  
displayed, or after canceling and setting again the timer  
standby mode, the program line(s) with error will be  
cleared.  
3 Correct the timer program by using  
[K / L / { / B], then press [ENTER].  
5) Press [TIMER PROG.] to exit.  
*1 PCA is a disc's space reserved for recording test.  
6) Press [TIMER SET] to return to the timer standby  
mode.  
Note  
• Press [TIMER PROG.] to check the timer recording in  
progress.  
When the timer recording is proceeding, that  
program will be highlighted in red. In this case, you  
cannot select any other program.  
EN 53  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 53  
2009/04/03 15:38:08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TIMER RECORDING  
Hints for Timer Recording  
• If there is a power failure or this unit has been  
unplugged for more than 30 seconds, the clock setting  
and all timer programming will be lost.  
press [PLAY B], or [OPEN/CLOSE A] to remove the disc.  
• During timer recording or timer standby mode ( will  
appear), any operations on the unit will not be available.  
To make these operations available, press [STOP C] to  
stop the timer recording or [TIMER SET] to cancel timer  
standby mode ( will disappear).  
• If a disc is not inserted or if a inserted disc is not  
recordable (finalized DVD-RW/-R, finalized DVD+RW, a  
fully recorded disc, etc.), “DVD” on the front panel  
display flashes and timer recording cannot be  
• To cancel the timer standby mode, press [TIMER SET].  
performed. In some cases,  
will appear momentarily  
• When the starting and the ending time are the same,  
“Exceeds 12 hours” appears and the program setting will  
not be accepted.  
• When the programmed starting and ending time are earlier  
than the current time, the setting will not be accepted.  
• If the starting time is earlier and the ending time is later  
than the current time, the recording will start right after  
[TIMER SET] is pressed.  
• The timer recording for digital TV cannot record any  
audio language other than default audio.  
• The timer recording cannot be performed in DVD and  
VCR at the same time. If you set 2 programming with the  
same channel and time in both devices, the program  
with a lower program number will be recorded.  
• “Press TIMER SET for timer recording” will appear on the TV  
screen 5 minutes before the programmed starting time.  
around the start point as the unit attempts to record.  
Please insert a recordable disc.  
• If a cassette tape with an erase-protection tab is not in  
the cassette compartment or there is no cassette tape in  
the cassette compartment, “VCR” on the front panel  
display flashes and timer recording cannot be  
performed. Please insert a recordable cassette tape.  
• If you press [TIMER SET] and turn on the unit while  
either DVD or VCR is in timer standby mode,  
disappears. In this case, you cannot change the mode  
between DVD and VCR. You cannot change any settings  
using [SETUP] or edit discs.  
• When all the timer recording is completed, flashes. To  
play back or eject the recorded disc, press  
[I/y ON/STANDBY] first, then select the recorded title and  
The Priority of Overlapped Settings  
This unit records the programs according to priority if the timer programmings are overlapped. The timer  
programming set previously has priority.  
A timer recording of lower priority will be canceled or start from the middle.  
Check the overlapped timer programmings and change the priority if necessary.  
When the starting time is the same:  
A program set previously (PROG. A) has priority.  
When the starting time and the ending time  
for each programs are different:  
A program that has earlier start time has priority.  
PROG. A  
PROG. A  
PROG. B  
PROG. B  
PROG. C  
actual  
recording  
actual  
recording  
PROG. A
PROG. A  
PROG. C  
PROG.  
B
PROG. B  
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.  
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.  
When the recording time is partially overlapped:  
PROG. A will start after PROG. B is complete to  
be recorded.  
When the recording time is entirely overlapped:  
PROG.A will not be recorded.  
PROG. A  
PROG. A  
PROG. B  
PROG. B  
actual  
actual  
recording  
PROG. B  
PROG.B  
PROG.A  
recording  
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.  
Note for DVD recording  
When the end time of the programming  
currently being recorded and the start time  
of the subsequent program are same:  
The beginning of the PROG. B may be cut off.  
• When the recording time of 2 programs are overlapped, or  
the end time of a program and the start time of another  
program is the same, the first 2 minutes (at the longest) of  
the subsequent program will be cut off.  
• If the cut-off portion comes up to 3 minutes or more, this  
program will be displayed with errors number E40 in the  
timer programming list.  
PROG. A  
PROG. B  
actual  
recording  
PROG. A  
PROG. B  
The first 2 minutes (at the longest) will be cut off.  
54 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 54  
2009/04/03 15:38:08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE  
Connection to an External Device  
Connect the external device properly to the unit by using input jacks either L2 (Front) or L1 (Rear).  
When connecting an external device of monaural output to this unit, use AUDIO L jack of L2 (Front).  
Use S-video or the RCA audio/video cables for this connection.  
When connecting a DVC (digital video camcorder), use the DV input jack on the front panel instead of S-VIDEO IN or  
VIDEO IN jack.  
or  
VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
DV-OUT  
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
L
R
R
L
external device  
(camcorder, VCR etc.)  
RCA  
video  
cable  
RCA  
DV cable  
(4-pin)  
RCA  
video  
cable  
S-video  
cable  
RCA  
audio  
cable  
or  
audio cable  
S-VIDEO  
IN ---AUDIO---OUT  
IN  
or  
IN ---VIDEO---OUT  
VIDEO  
L
R
DV  
L2  
L3  
L1  
to L2 & L3  
to L1  
front of this unit  
rear of this unit  
Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows:  
• RCA audio cable (L/R) x 1  
• RCA video cable x 1  
Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store.  
Use [K / L] to select “Video”, then  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
press [ENTER].  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
3
4
5
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Use [K / L] to select “Select Video”,  
then press [ENTER].  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Use [K / L] to select the input jack  
ENTER  
type to connect, then press [ENTER].  
If you want to use VIDEO IN jack, select “Video  
In”.  
If you want to use S-VIDEO IN jack, select  
“S-Video In”.  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
Select Video - L1 (Rear)  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Press [SETUP].  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
1
2
Use [K / L] to select “General  
Setting”, then press [ENTER].  
6
EN 55  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 55  
2009/04/03 15:38:10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTINGS FOR AN EXTERNAL DEVICE  
Recording from an External Device  
Turn on the TV and press  
Before recording from an external device, refer to the  
instructions for the connection on page 55.  
[I/y ON/STANDBY], and be sure to  
select the input of the TV to which  
the unit is connected.  
1
2
OPEN/  
INPUT  
HDMI  
CLOSE SELECT  
When you want to record to the disc:  
Press [DVD].  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the disc  
tray. Place the disc to record properly.  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] again to close  
the disc tray.  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
It takes awhile to load  
the disc.  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
When you want to record to a  
cassette tape:  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Press [VCR].  
ENTER  
Insert the cassette tape with an  
erase-protection tab into the cassette  
compartment.  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Select the input of the unit which the  
external device is connected. (L1, L2  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
3
4
or L3)  
• To use the input jacks on the rear of this unit;  
Select “L1 (Rear)” by using [INPUT SELECT  
PAUSE  
VCR  
]
or [CH ].  
/
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
• To use the input jacks on the front of this unit;  
Select “L2 (Front)” or “L3 (DV-IN)” by using  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
[INPUT SELECT ] or [CH  
/
].  
• You can also select “L1 (Rear)” or “L2 (Front)” by  
using [the Number buttons].  
- For L1, press [0], [0], [1].  
- For L2, press [0], [0], [2].  
1
7 5  
Press [REC MODE] repeatedly to  
select a recording mode.  
Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 45 for DVD or  
“Recording” on page 111 for VCR.  
Press [I REC] on the unit to start  
recording.  
5
6
7
2
7 5  
Start playback on the external device  
to record from.  
Press [STOP C] / [EJECT/STOPA/C]  
on the unit to stop recording.  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
56 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 56  
2009/04/03 15:38:12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DV DUBBING  
Guide to DV and On-Screen Display  
This function helps you to easily dub the contents of the DVC (digital video camcorder) to this unit.  
You can control basic operations of the DVC from the remote control of this unit such as playback, fast forward or  
reverse and stop all operations if the DVC is in video mode. Use the DV cable that has 4-pin input jack and is  
compliance with the IEEE1394 standards. When you connect to DV input jack on the front of this unit, select  
“L3(DV-IN)” position by using [INPUT SELECT ] or [CH  
/
] on the remote control and press [DISPLAY] to show  
the DV dubbing information for the operation of your DVC.  
DVD mode  
When the DVC is  
When the DVC is not  
in camera mode...  
in video mode...  
1
1/  
1
1/  
1
1/  
1
1/  
1
-
RW VR ORG  
-RW VR ORG  
The menu changes according to  
what mode of DVC.  
Switch the mode on the DVC to  
playback mode for the dubbing  
information.  
Control  
DV Audio  
Start Rec  
DVD  
Stereo1  
L3 (DV-IN)  
AB-1234  
0:12:34  
L3 (DV-IN)  
AB-1234  
0:12:34  
5
2
SP  
1:00  
SP  
1:00  
3
4
7
6
VCR mode  
You cannot control the DVC in VCR mode. For dubbing onto VCR, refer to page 59.  
The following instructions are described with the operations using the remote control of this unit.  
1. DV icon  
6. Product name of your DVC  
2. Indicator of active device  
• When the “Control” is  
• If the unit cannot recognize the  
input signal from the DVC or the  
unknown product, “No Device” or  
“****” will appear instead.  
7. Status of the current operation  
and the time counter  
highlighted, press [ENTER] to  
display the item selection. Use  
[K / L] to select the device you  
wish to operate, then press  
[ENTER] to activate.  
Each icon means (Available icons  
may vary depending on the DVC):  
• Select “DVD” to control this unit.  
• Select “DVC” to control your DVC.  
3. Recording audio mode  
• Other than the DVC is in stop  
mode, the “DV Audio” can be  
selected. Press [ENTER] to display  
the item selection and then use  
[K / L] to select the audio you  
wish to output. Press [ENTER]  
again to activate.  
DVC is in stop mode.  
DVC is in playback mode.  
DVC is in pause mode.  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
(in stop mode)  
DVC is fast reversing.  
(in stop mode)  
DVC is fast reversing.  
(standard speed)  
DVC is fast reversing.  
(faster than above)  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
(standard speed)  
DVC is fast reversing.  
(faster than above)  
DVC is in slow reverse  
playback.  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
(faster than above)  
DVC is fast forwarding.  
(faster than above)  
DVC is slow forwarding.  
(standard speed)  
DVC is slow forwarding.  
(faster than above)  
• Select “Stereo1” to dub the stereo  
sound.  
• Select “Stereo2” to dub the sound  
with after recording sound.  
• Select “Mix” to dub the stereo1  
and stereo2.  
4. Indicator of dubbing function  
• When the unit is ready for  
dubbing, “Start Rec” will appear.  
• When the unit is in dubbing,  
“Pause Rec” will appear.  
DVC is in recording.  
DVC is in recording pause  
mode.  
DVC is slow forwarding.  
(faster than above)  
5. Channel position  
• When you select “L3 (DV-IN)” by  
using [INPUT SELECT ] or  
[CH  
/
], “L3 (DV-IN)” will  
appear.  
EN 57  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 57  
2009/04/03 15:38:16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DV DUBBING  
DVC to DVD Dubbing  
Press [REC MODE] repeatedly to  
select a recording mode.  
Before recording from DVC, see page 55 for connection  
instructions.  
(Refer to “Recording Mode” on page 45 for DVD or  
“Recording” on page 111 for VCR.)  
2
OPEN/  
INPUT  
Press [DISPLAY].  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
3
4
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
With “Control” highlighted, press  
[ENTER] to display the available  
devices to control with the remote  
control of this unit. Use [K / L] to  
select “DVC”, then press [ENTER].  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
1/  
1
1/  
1
-RW VR ORG  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Control  
DV Audio  
Start Rec  
DVD  
Stereo1  
L3 (DV-IN)  
AB-1234  
0:12:34  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
XP  
1:00  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Now you can operate your DVC with the remote  
control of this unit.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Press [PLAY B] to start playing back  
the DVC, and find where you wish to  
start dubbing.  
Then, press [STOP C] when you come  
to the desired start point.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
5
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Use [K / L] to select “Start Rec”, then  
press [ENTER].  
SE-R0294  
The dubbing will start.  
6
7
To stop dubbing;  
Use [K / L] to select “Control”, then  
press [ENTER].  
Use [K / L] to select “DVD”, then  
press [ENTER].  
Then press [STOP C].  
Press [DVD] first.  
Preparing for DV to DVD dubbing:  
• Insert a recordable disc and make sure your DVC is in  
video mode.  
Use [INPUT SELECT ] or [CH  
to select “L3 (DV-IN)”.  
/
]
1
L3 (DV-IN)  
AB-1234  
0:00:00  
58 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 58  
2009/04/03 15:38:19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DV DUBBING  
DVC to VCR Dubbing  
Repeat the steps 1 and 2 on page 58.  
Before recording from DVC, refer to page 55 for  
connection instructions.  
1
2
This DVC to VCR dubbing is available only for audio /  
video out connection and not available for S-video,  
component or HDMI connection. (Refer to  
Press the PLAY button on your DVC  
to find where you wish to start  
dubbing. Then, press the PAUSE  
button on the DV camcorder when  
you come to the desired start point.  
“Information on VCR Functions” on page 111).  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Press [REC I] to start recording.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
3
4
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Press the PLAY button or the PAUSE  
button on your DVC to resume the  
playback.  
The dubbing will start.  
To pause the recording:  
Press [PAUSE F] once.  
“I” will flash.  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
To resume recording:  
Press [REC I] or press [PAUSE F] again.  
“I” will reappear.  
SE-R0294  
Press [VCR] first.  
Preparing for DV to VCR dubbing:  
• Insert a recordable cassette tape and make sure your  
DVC is in video mode.  
To stop recording, press [STOP C].  
5
Note for DV dubbing  
• If you press [PAUSE F] at step 5 in “DVC to DVD Dubbing” on page 58, the tape will rewind to the point a few  
seconds preceding the paused point. When you press [ENTER] at step 6 in “DVC to DVD Dubbing” on page 58, then,  
it will start dubbing when it comes to the paused point.  
• The unit does not send out the output signal to DVC.  
• For the proper operation, connect DVC to the unit directly. Do not connect this unit and DVC via any other unit.  
• Do not connect more than 1 DVC.  
• The unit can only accept DVC. Other DV device such as cable/satellite box or D-VHS VCR cannot be recognized.  
• If no video signal is detected from the DVC during DVC to DVD dubbing, the recording will be paused and “I” will  
flash on the TV screen. The recording will resume when the unit detects the video signal again.  
• When the DVC is in camera mode, refer to “Guide to DV and On-Screen Display” on page 57.  
• You cannot dub from DVC during timer standby mode.  
• You cannot dub from DVC to the both DVD and VCR at the same time.  
• You cannot change the output mode during DVC to VCR dubbing. If you want to switch to the DVD mode, stop  
the VCR first.  
• During DVC to VCR dubbing, you cannot change channels while paused.  
• When output is in DVD mode while playing back a DVD using L3 (DV-IN), you cannot switch to the VCR mode.  
• If you are using anything other than L3 (DV-IN) to playback DVD, you can switch to the VCR mode, but cannot  
select L3 (DV-IN) channel. (You can select L3 (DV-IN) after switching to the DVD mode during VCR playback.)  
• During timer standby of either component, you cannot select L3 (DV-IN) even on the component which is not in  
timer standby.  
• Date / time and cassette memory data will not be recorded.  
• Pictures with a copy-guard signal cannot be recorded.  
• A DV terminal is a terminal that can use the transmission mode conforming to the IEEE 1394 standards called “Fire  
Wire”. It serves as the interface that connects the PC and peripheral device such as “i.LINK” (registered trademark  
of SONY). It enables digital dubbing between DV devices with little degradation.  
EN 59  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 59  
2009/04/03 15:38:23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/VCR DUBBING  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
“General Setting” menu will appear.  
You can copy a DVD to a cassette tape or copy a cassette  
tape to a DVD. This function will be possible only if the  
DVD or the cassette tape is not copy protected.  
Before starting this function, prepare for the recording on  
the DVD-RW/-R or the cassette tape. Refer to pages 45  
and 111.  
1
2
3
Use [K / L] to select “Recording”,  
then press [ENTER].  
“Recording” menu will appear.  
Make sure:  
• Insert a recordable disc and a cassette tape with an  
erase-protection tab.  
Note for recording to a cassette tape:  
• The cassette tape's erase-protection tab is intact.  
• The remaining time of the cassette tape is long enough.  
Note for recording to a disc:  
Use [K / L] to select “Dubbing  
Mode”, then press [ENTER].  
Selection menu will appear.  
• Make sure that the disc is recordable. Refer to page 9.  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
60 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 60  
2009/04/03 15:38:24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/VCR DUBBING  
VCR to DVD  
DVD to VCR  
Use [K / L] to select “VCR DVD”,  
Use [K / L] to select “DVD VCR”,  
then press [ENTER].  
then press [ENTER].  
4
4
Dubbing Mode  
Dubbing Mode  
VCR  
DVD  
DVD  
VCR  
VCR  
DVD  
DVD  
VCR  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
Press [VCR].  
Press [DVD].  
5
6
5
6
7
8
9
Press [PLAY B]. Then press  
[PAUSE F] at the point you wish to  
start recording.  
• Since it takes about a few seconds before the  
actual dubbing begins, please allow extra 5  
seconds when selecting the starting point.  
Press [PLAY B]. Then press  
[PAUSE F] at the point you wish to  
start recording.  
Press [VCR], then press [REC MODE]  
repeatedly to select the desired  
recording mode.  
Press [DVD], then press [REC MODE]  
repeatedly to select the desired  
recording mode.  
Press [DUBBING].  
DVD to VCR duplication will start.  
7
8
9
Press [DUBBING].  
VCR to DVD duplication will start.  
Press [STOP C] to stop the recording.  
Press [STOP C] to stop the recording.  
Title list will automatically appear.  
• If you want to watch the duplicated material  
after the VCR to DVD duplication, press [TOP  
MENU] first then press [ENTER] twice.  
Note  
• You cannot change the output mode during VCR to DVD or DVD to VCR duplication.  
• When “L3 (DV-IN)“ is selected as input, dubbing cannot be performed. Dubbing can be performed with either L1  
or L2 inputs.  
For DVD to VCR duplication:  
• This function is available on Audio CD, not MP3, WMA, JPEG nor DivX® files.  
• The recording mode for VCR cannot be displayed at step 7 when using HDMI / Component / S-Video connection.  
To display the VCR recording mode on the screen, the unit must be connected by the VIDEO OUT jack and the TV’s  
input select should be set to the appropriate external input channel.  
For VCR to DVD duplication:  
• After starting VCR to DVD duplication, the picture may be distorted because of the auto tracking function.  
This is not a malfunction. Be advised to playback the cassette tape until the picture is stabilized, then set the  
starting point where you wish to start recording, and start VCR to DVD duplication.  
• The playback sound mode is followed by the setting of VCR playback sound mode on page 113. Set the playback  
sound mode to which you wish to record to the DVD.  
• This unit will automatically stop the duplication if playback with no image is for more than 3 minutes during VCR  
to DVD duplication.  
• Dubbing indicator will appear on the front panel display during dubbing.  
EN 61  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 61  
2009/04/03 15:38:27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK  
Structure of Disc Contents  
The contents of DVD are generally divided into titles, and the titles are subdivided into chapters.  
Audio CDs are divided into tracks.  
Data disc contains MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX® are divided into folders, and the folders are subdivided into files.  
DVD  
Title:  
Divided contents of a DVD video. Roughly  
corresponds to a story title in short stories.  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3  
Chapter: Divided contents of a title. This corresponds to  
a chapter in a story.  
Track:  
Divided contents of an audio CD.  
Folder:  
Divided contents of a MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®  
data disc. Consists of number of files.  
Audio CD  
Each title, chapter, or track, folder or file is assigned a  
number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number”,  
“track number”, “folder number” or “file number”  
respectively.  
Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5  
Some discs may not have these numbers.  
MP3/WMA/JPEG/DivX®  
folder 1  
folder 2  
file 1 file 2  
file 3  
file 4  
file 5  
62 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 62  
2009/04/03 15:38:28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC PLAYBACK  
Direct Playback  
Press [I/y ON/STANDBY].  
Turn on the TV and be sure to select the input to  
which the unit is connected.  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
HDMI  
CLOSE SELECT  
1
2
Press [DVD].  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the  
disc tray and insert your disc with its  
label facing up.  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Align the disc to  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
the disc tray guide.  
ENTER  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
disc tray.  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
3
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
It may take awhile to load  
the disc completely.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Press [PLAY B] to start playback.  
If you are playing back a DVD-video, a menu  
may appear.  
PAUSE  
VCR  
4
5
Refer to “Using the Title/Disc Menu” on page 68.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Press [STOP C] once to stop playback  
temporarily.  
• Refer to “Resume Playback” on page 69.  
SE-R0294  
Note  
• Some discs may start playback automatically.  
• Playback will stop when you change the output  
mode.  
EN 63  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 63  
2009/04/03 15:38:28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC PLAYBACK  
Playback from the Title List  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to open the  
disc tray and insert your disc with its  
label facing up.  
2
OPEN/  
INPUT  
HDMI  
CLOSE SELECT  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
Align the disc to  
the disc tray guide.  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the  
disc tray.  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
3
4
5
It may take awhile to load  
the disc completely.  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Title list will appear automatically.  
ENTER  
Press [TOP MENU].  
Title list will appear.  
Press [DISC MENU] to switch Original/Playlist if  
necessary.  
• To exit the title list, press [STOP C].  
• To resume the title list, press [TOP MENU].  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Use [K / L / { / B] to select a desired  
title, then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
Title List  
ORG  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 SP  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
1:00AM (0:12:00)  
JAN/ 1/09  
CH10 SP  
1
2
3
6
4
5
SE-R0294  
1 / 6  
Use [K / L] to select “Play From  
Start”, then press [ENTER].  
6
7
Press [I/y ON/STANDBY].  
Play From Start  
Edit  
Title Delete  
Add To Playlist  
Turn on the TV and be sure to select the input to  
which the unit is connected.  
1
Press [DVD].  
Playback will start.  
Press [STOP C] once to stop playback  
temporarily.  
• Refer to “Resume Playback” on page 69.  
To eject the disc, press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to  
open the disc tray, then remove the disc before  
turning off the unit.  
Note  
• You can also start playback by pressing [PLAY B]  
instead of [ENTER] at step 5 on this page.  
• At step 4, you can press [SKIP G], or press [B]  
when the title on the lower right of the title list is  
highlighted to display the next page, and press  
[SKIP H], or press [{] when the title on the upper  
left of the title list is highlighted to display the  
previous page.  
64 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 64  
2009/04/03 15:38:30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC PLAYBACK  
Playing Back an Audio CD and a CD-RW/-R with MP3/WMA/JPEG Files  
When selecting track/file:  
Playback will start.  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
HDMI  
CLOSE SELECT  
When selecting folder:  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Use [K / L] to select the file or folder you want to play  
back, then press [ENTER].  
• Press [PLAY B], [ENTER] or [B] to move to any lower  
hierarchies.  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
• Press [s] or [RETURN] to move back to the previous  
hierarchy.  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Hints for audio CD tracks and MP3 / WMA / JPEG files:  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
• Folders are shown by  
.
• Audio CD tracks are shown by  
.
DDIISSCCMMEENNUU  
TOP MENU  
3
• MP3 files are shown by  
.
W
• WMA files are shown by  
• JPEG files are shown by  
.
.
ENTER  
• The system can recognize up to 255 folders and, up to  
99 tracks/999 files.  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space  
will be displayed as “…”.  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
•
If there are no files in the folder, “No Files” will be displayed.  
REV  
SKIP  
PLAY  
STOP  
It is recommended that files to be played back in this  
unit are recorded under the following specifications:  
SKIP  
<MP3 / WMA>  
• Sampling frequency  
• Constant bit rate  
: 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.  
: 112 kbps - 320 kbps (MP3),  
48 kbps - 192 kbps  
(WMA).  
PAUSE  
Follow steps 1 to 2 in “Direct  
Playback” on page 63.  
<JPEG>  
• Upper limit  
• Lower limit  
• File size of image maximum : 12 MB.  
: 6,300 x 5,100 dots.  
: 32 x 32 dots.  
1
2
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the  
disc tray.  
Note  
It may take awhile to load  
the disc completely.  
• The audio source of MP3 files cannot be recorded as  
digital sound by an MD or DAT deck.  
When an audio CD is inserted, track list will appear.  
When you insert a CD-RW/-R mixed with MP3/  
WMA/JPEG files, the playback media selection  
screen will be displayed.  
For MP3/WMA, select “Music”, for JPEG, select  
“Photo”.  
• Files whose extension is other than “.mp3(MP3)”  
“.wma(WMA)” or “.jpg / .jpeg(JPEG)” will not be listed.  
• Some unplayable folders or files may be listed due to  
the recording status.  
• High-resolution JPEG files take longer to be displayed.  
When a CD-RW/-R with MP3/WMA/JPEG files is  
inserted, file list will appear.  
• Progressive JPEG files (JPEG files saved in progressive  
format) cannot be played back on this unit.  
• To exit the file list, press [STOP C].  
• To resume the file list, press [TOP MENU].  
• The JPEG pictures can also rotate by using [s / B].  
• Press [DISC MENU] to call up the playback media  
This DVD Video Recorder requires discs/recordings to  
meet certain technical standards in order to achieve  
optimal playback quality. There are many different types  
of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing  
MP3/WMA files). Not all recordable discs will operate or  
produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria  
set forth in this owner's manual are meant only as a  
guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.  
selection screen in stop mode.  
Use [K / L] to select a desired folder  
or track/file, then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) JPEG File List  
3
File List  
DISC NAME  
A
B
You must obtain any required permission from  
copyright owners to download or use copyrighted  
content. Toshiba cannot and does not grant such  
permission.  
JPEG file1  
JPEG file2  
JPEG file3  
JPEG file4  
JPEG file5  
JPEG file6  
1/ 2  
EN 65  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 65  
2009/04/03 15:38:34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC PLAYBACK  
Playing Back a DivX®  
Follow steps 1 to 2 in “Direct  
Playback” on page 63.  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
HDMI  
CLOSE SELECT  
1
2
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to close the  
disc tray.  
It may take awhile to load  
the disc completely.  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
File list will appear automatically.  
• To exit the file list, press [STOP C].  
• To resume the file list, press [TOP MENU].  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Use [K / L] to select the desired  
folder or file, then press [ENTER].  
File List  
3
ENTER  
DISC NAME  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Folder1  
Folder2  
DivX File1  
DivX File2  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
When selecting file:  
Playback will start.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
When selecting folder:  
PAUSE  
VCR  
The files in the folder will appear.  
Use [K / L] to select the file you want to play back, then  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
press [ENTER].  
• Press [PLAY B], [ENTER] or [B] to move to any lower  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
hierarchy.  
• Press [s] or [RETURN] to move back to the previous  
hierarchy.  
SE-R0294  
DivX® subtitle  
The subtitle created by the user can be displayed  
during DivX® playback.  
1)After selecting the DivX® file, the “Subtitle List”  
menu will appear when “DivX Subtitle” is set to  
anything other than “OFF”. (Refer to page 107.)  
2)Use [K / L] to select the extension you want to  
display, then press [ENTER].  
Subtitle List  
DivX File1  
OFF  
SMI  
SRT  
SUB  
ASS  
SSA  
TXT  
DivX® with the subtitle starts playback. The subtitle  
cannot be displayed when the setting is “OFF”.  
• If there is more than one extension, the extension  
selection appears in the subtitle list.  
66 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 66  
2009/04/03 15:38:38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC PLAYBACK  
Playing Back a DivX® (cont’d)  
It is recommended that files to be played back in this  
unit are recorded under the following specifications:  
Official DivX® Certified product  
• Playable codec of AVI files : DivX®3.x, DivX®4.x,  
DivX®5.x, DivX®6.0  
• Some DivX® VOD files are  
restricted with the limited  
playable times (you cannot  
play them back beyond the  
limit). If your DivX® VOD file  
has such limit, the playback  
confirmation screen will  
appear.  
R
DivX VOD Rental  
This rental has  
Do you want to use one  
of your views now?  
views left.  
Yes  
No  
• Maximum size of image  
: 720 x 480 @30 fps  
720 x 576 @25 fps  
• Sampling frequency of audio: 8 kHz - 48 kHz  
• Audio type : MPEG1 audio layer 3(MP3),  
Use [s / B] to select “Yes” if you want to play back the  
file, or to select “No” if you do not wish to play it back.  
Then, press [ENTER] to  
MPEG1 audio layer 2,  
Dolby Digital  
confirm the selection.  
Hint for the purchased or rental official DivX®  
Certified product  
• When you purchased or rental a DivX® file through the  
official site of DivX® video which is called DivX® Video-  
On-Demand (VOD) services, a registration code is  
required every time you get the new file from the DivX®  
VOD services. Refer to “DivX® VOD” on page 107.  
• You cannot play back the  
DivX® VOD files, of which  
rental period has been  
expired. In such case, press  
[TOP MENU] and select other  
files that can be played back.  
Rental Expired  
This rental is expired.  
Please push ‘TOP MENU’.  
Note for DivX®  
• DivX® is a codec (compression/decompression) that can  
compress images to a very small amount of data. The  
software can compress video data from almost any devices to  
the size that can be sent on the Internet without  
compromising visual quality of the images.  
• A file with an extension of “.avi” and “.divx” is called an DivX®  
file. All files with the “.avi” extension are recognized as  
MPEG4.  
• Files whose extension other than “.avi” and “.divx” will not be  
listed on the DivX® menu. However, unplayable folders and  
files may be displayed, depending on the recording  
conditions.  
• If DivX® files written on a CD-RW/-R cannot be played back,  
rewrite them on a DVD-RW/-R or DVD+RW/+R and try to play  
back.  
Title List  
• For more information for DivX®,  
please visit  
http://www.divx.com.  
Video Files  
Music  
Photo  
• If you insert a CD-RW/-R with  
DivX® files that are mixed with  
MP3/WMA/JPEG files, the  
playback media selection screen  
will be displayed. Please select  
“Video Files” and proceed to next step.  
• Even if the file has an extension of either “.avi” and “.divx”,  
this unit cannot play it back if it is recorded in the format  
other than DivX®.  
• Press [DISC MENU] to call up the Title List in stop mode.  
• If you select “Music” instead of “Video Files” on Title List, this  
unit can play back MP3/WMA files.  
• A symbol of  
is shown on the top of the file name.  
• If you select “Photo” instead of “Video Files” on Title List, this  
unit can play back JPEG files.  
• A maximum of 255 folders or 999 files may be recognized in a  
disc.  
• Up to 8 hierarchies can be recognized in a folder. Files in the  
9th or deeper hierarchies cannot be played back.  
•
Some DivX® files cannot be played back on this unit due to the  
configuration and characteristics of the disc, or due to the condition of  
recording and authoring software.  
• If there are more than 9 files, a down arrow “ ” appears,  
indicating that the user can view another part on the  
previous page. The current page number and the number of  
total pages are shown on the bottom of the screen.  
• Letters of a file/folder name overflowing the given space will  
be displayed as “…”.  
• You cannot play back the  
DivX® VOD files obtained with  
different registration codes on  
this unit. Press [TOP MENU]  
and select other files that can  
be played back.  
Authorization Error  
This player is not authorized to  
play this video.  
Please push 'TOP MENU'.  
• You can play back the disc recorded in multi-session.  
Note for DivX® subtitle  
• It may take awhile for audio and images to be output after  
• To utilize this function, the  
you inserted a disc and pressed [PLAY B].  
following conditions must meet.  
• When playing back the files recorded in high bit rates, the  
images can be interrupted in some occasions.  
– “DivX Subtitle” must be activated in “DivX” menu. (Refer to  
“DivX Subtitle” on page 107.)  
• Although DivX® logo has been obtained for this unit, it may  
not be able to play back some data, depending on the  
characteristics, bit rates, or audio format settings, etc.  
– Playback file and the subtitle file must have the same name.  
– Playback file and the subtitle file must locate in the same  
folder.  
• A DivX® file whose file size exceeds 2 GB cannot be played  
back.  
• If a large-sized DivX® file is selected, it may take awhile to  
start the playback (over 20 seconds sometimes).  
– Only the subtitle files with the following extensions are  
supported; .smi (.SMI), .srt (.SRT), .sub (.SUB) .ass  
(.ASS), .ssa (.SSA), .txt (.TXT).  
(.sub (.SUB) and .txt (.TXT) files may not be recognized.)  
•
If you try to playback the DivX® file that has the screen  
resolution which this unit does not support, the playback will  
be stopped and error message will appear.  
– The subtitles that exceeds the playback time of the DivX® file  
will not be displayed.  
EN 67  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 67  
2009/04/03 15:38:40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC PLAYBACK  
Using the Title/Disc Menu  
Pause  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [PAUSE F].  
Playback will be paused and sound will be muted.  
DVD may contain a title list, which describes the contents  
of the disc, or a disc menu, which guides you through the  
available functions in the disc.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)Press [TOP MENU] or [DISC MENU] to call up the  
title list or disc menu.  
2)Use [K / L / { / B] to make a selection, and then  
press [ENTER] to enable your selection.  
F
3)Press [STOP C] to exit the disc menu.  
2)Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.  
Note  
Note  
• You can select a numbered menu with [the Number  
buttons] also.  
• For DVD/DivX® files, set “Still Mode” to “Field” in  
“Playback” menu if pictures in the pause mode are  
blurred. (Refer to page 102.)  
• Menus vary among discs. Refer to the information  
accompanying the disc for details.  
• [DISC MENU] or [TOP MENU] will not always be  
effective for all DVDs.  
68 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 68  
2009/04/03 15:38:42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL PLAYBACK  
Skipping TV Commercials During  
Resume Playback  
Playback  
You can play back from where you stopped playing back  
the disc last.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [STOP C].  
The resume message will appear.  
You can skip TV commercials to enjoy the recorded  
programs without interrupting.  
Press [DVD] first.  
During playback, press [INSTANT SKIP].  
Resume ON  
Normal playback will start at 30 seconds ahead from  
where you press [INSTANT SKIP].  
2)Press [PLAY B].  
In a few seconds, playback will resume from the point  
at which it stopped last. You can resume playback at  
the same point even if you turn the unit into the  
standby mode.  
Every time you press [INSTANT SKIP], the searching  
point will be extended by 30 seconds ahead.  
You can press [INSTANT SKIP] up to 6 times (180 seconds).  
To cancel the resume playback and start playing back  
the disc from the beginning, press [STOP C] again  
while the playback is stopped.  
e.g.) Press [INSTANT SKIP] once.  
Note  
• For MP3/WMA/JPEG files, playback will resume from  
the beginning of the file at which playback was  
stopped.  
Instant Skip 30sec.  
Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Playback  
(forwarding 30 seconds)  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [FWD D] or [REV E].  
Every time you press [FWD D] or [REV E],  
approximate speed will be changed as follows.  
Fast forward or fast reverse playback across titles (for  
DVD), or files (for MP3 / WMA / DivX® files) is not  
possible.  
B
Playback will return to the normal playback.  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
normal  
speed  
REV  
REV  
REV  
REV  
REV  
REV  
40x  
20x  
5x  
2x  
20x  
40x  
playback  
For audio CD, MP3/WMA files, approximate speed is  
fixed at 8x with sound.  
Picture quality of DivX® files in fast reverse is lower  
than that in fast forward.  
For some DivX® files, fast forward/fast reverse may not  
function.  
2)Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.  
Note  
• Forward/reverse speed will be indicated with icons  
as follows.  
forward (approx. speed)  
2x:  
20x:  
40x:  
reverse (approx. speed)  
5x:  
20x:  
40x:  
EN 69  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 69  
2009/04/03 15:38:43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL PLAYBACK  
Rapid Playback  
Slow Forward / Slow Reverse Playback  
Rapid playback function is available only during  
playback.  
This function is available only on discs recorded in the  
Dolby Digital format, and plays back in a slightly faster/  
slower speed while keeping the sound output.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [PAUSE F]. Then press  
[FWD D] or [REV E].  
Every time you press [FWD D] or [REV E],  
approximate speed will be changed as follows. (The  
sound will remain muted.)  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY].  
Press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY] once during playback.  
Plays back approximately at 0.8 times of normal  
playback.  
B x0.8 :  
B x1.3:  
B :  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
FWD  
REV  
REV  
REV  
REV  
REV  
REV  
pause  
1/4x  
1/8x  
1/16x  
1/16x  
1/8x  
1/3x  
Press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY] twice during playback.  
Plays back approximately at 1.3 times of normal  
playback.  
2)Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.  
Note  
Press [1.3X / 0.8X PLAY] thrice to play back in  
normal speed.  
No effects.  
• Forward/reverse speed will be indicated with icons  
as follows.  
forward (approx. speed)  
1/16x:  
2)Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.  
1/8x:  
Note  
1/3x:  
• Audio (language) setting cannot be changed while  
using this mode.  
reverse (approx. speed)  
1/16x:  
1/8x:  
1/4x:  
• This feature may not work at some point in a disc.  
• Audio is LPCM (2 channel) during rapid playback.  
• For some DivX® files, slow forward/slow reverse may  
not function.  
• Only slow forward is available when playing back  
DivX® files.  
Step by Step Playback  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [PAUSE F].  
Playback will be paused and sound will be muted.  
2)Press [SKIP i ] repeatedly.  
Playback will advance one frame at a time when you  
press [SKIP i ] with the sound muted.  
To play back step by step backward:  
Press [SKIP j ] repeatedly.  
Every time you press the button, the playback will go  
backward by one frame.  
• Press and hold [SKIP j ] / [SKIP i ] to reverse/  
advance continuously.  
3)Press [PLAY B] to return to the normal playback.  
Note  
• Only step by step forward playback is available for  
playing back DivX® files.  
70 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 70  
2009/04/03 15:38:47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL PLAYBACK  
Zoom  
Marker Setting  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY] or [ZOOM].  
This feature allows you to assign a specific point on a disc  
to be called back later.  
Press [DVD] first.  
• If you press [ZOOM], skip to step3.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY] to bring up the  
display menu.  
If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
menu.  
to display the selection  
e.g.) DVD-video  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
e.g.) DVD-video  
to display the marker list.  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
3)Use [K / L] to select a desired zoom factor to zoom,  
then press [ENTER].  
3)Use [K / L] to select a desired marker number.  
When it reaches the desired point, press [ENTER].  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
× 1.2  
× 1.5  
× 2.0  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Zoom menu will appear.  
There are four options  
(x1.0, x1.2, x1.5 and x2.0), these are displayed  
excluding the current zoom rate.  
The title (track) number and the time will be displayed.  
Zoom area will be displayed.  
4)To return to the marker:  
Use [K / L] to select the desired marker number,  
then press [ENTER].  
4)Use [K / L / { / B] to select a desired zoom  
position, then press [ENTER].  
Note  
• To clear a marker, select the marker number to be  
cleared, then press [CLEAR].  
• All markers will be erased when you operate these  
operations listed below.  
– Opening the disc tray  
Zoom playback will start.  
– Turning the unit into the standby mode  
– Recording on a recordable disc  
• You can mark up to 6 points.  
Note  
• When selecting a smaller factor than the current one,  
the zoom area will not be displayed.  
• To exit the zoom menu, press [RETURN] repeatedly.  
• To cancel the zoom function, select “x1.0” using  
[K / L], then press [ENTER] at step 3.  
• You cannot slide the zoomed picture on some JPEG  
files.  
EN 71  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 71  
2009/04/03 15:38:51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL PLAYBACK  
Chasing Playback during Recording  
You can play back the already recorded part of the  
currently recording program without waiting for the  
recording to the end. This function works from 1  
minute after the start of the recording.  
Using [TIME SLIP] ...  
With [TIME SLIP], even if you leave your couch while  
you are watching TV through this unit, you can come  
back and watch rest of the program from right where  
you left at any convenient time with just one button.  
Please make sure to put VR mode DVD-RW disc, and set  
the recording mode to LP, EP or SLP.  
1)During recording, press [PLAY B].  
Playback will start from the beginning of the program  
that you are currently recording.  
1)While viewing a TV broadcast via this unit, press  
[TIME SLIP].  
Screen for the current playback:  
This unit start to record the TV broadcast.  
6/  
6
1/  
1
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
RW VR ORG  
-
2)Press [TIME SLIP] again.  
Playback will start from the point at which you press  
[TIME SLIP] first while recording continues.  
• While viewing the recorded content, you can pause  
and resume the playback by pressing [TIME SLIP].  
3)Press [STOP C] once to stop playback.  
To stop recording, press [STOP C] again.  
LP  
1:01  
To cancel the resume, press [STOP C] again.  
If you play back the fast forward playback and the  
playback reaches the scene recorded 1 minute before,  
the forwarding playback will automatically return to  
the normal playback.  
Note  
• Playback image may freeze momentarily using this  
function.  
2)Press [STOP C] once to stop playback.  
The resume message will appear.  
Screen for the current recording:  
However, this does not affect the recording.  
• The 2x fast forward playback is not available.  
• [REC I] is not available during this function.  
• You must cancel this function first by pressing  
[STOP C] once. Then you can use [REC I] to use  
OTR (one-touch timer recording) function or change  
recording time for the OTR.  
6
1
1:23:45  
RW VR ORG  
-
CH 10  
• “Wait for a moment.” will be displayed on the screen  
if you press [PLAY B] before 1 minute of recording.  
• This function is available only when you are  
recording on a DVD-RW in VR mode, with the  
recording mode LP, EP or SLP.  
Resume ON  
LP  
1:01  
To stop recording, press [STOP C] again.  
To cancel the resume, press [STOP C] again.  
72 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 72  
2009/04/03 15:38:55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL PLAYBACK  
Simultaneous Playback and Recording  
3)Press [STOP C] once to stop playback.  
The resume message will appear.  
Screen for the current recording:  
You can also play back a recorded title during current  
recording or the timer recording on the same disc.  
1)During recording, press [DISPLAY].  
Screen for the current recording:  
3
1
1:30:25  
RW VR ORG  
-
CH 10  
3
1
1:23:45  
RW VR ORG  
-
CH 10  
Resume ON  
LP  
1:01  
2)Select  
Title:  
icon using [{ / B], then press [ENTER].  
will be highlighted.  
To stop recording, press [STOP C] again.  
To cancel the resume, press [STOP C] again.  
The title number next to  
Enter a desired title number to search using  
[K / L] or [the Number buttons], then press  
[ENTER].  
Note  
• Playback image may freeze momentarily using this  
function.  
Selected title playback will start.  
However, this does not affect the recording.  
• The 2x fast forward playback is not available.  
Chapter:  
To move to  
• This function is available only when you are  
recording on a DVD-RW in VR mode, with the  
recording mode LP, EP or SLP.  
• Only the titles (chapters) in the original can be  
selected.  
for chapter, press [B].  
Enter a desired chapter number to search using  
[K / L] or [the Number buttons], then press  
[ENTER].  
You cannot select titles from the title list.  
Selected chapter playback will start.  
• When you stop the playback after the timer  
recording is completed, the unit will be switched to  
the timer standby mode if another program has been  
set (refer to “Hints for Timer Recording” on page 54).  
If you play back the currently recording program and the  
playback reaches the scene recorded 1 minute before,  
the forwarding playback will automatically return to the  
normal playback.  
EN 73  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 73  
2009/04/03 15:38:56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEARCH  
Title/Chapter Search  
Track Search  
Using [SKIP j ] / [SKIP i ]  
Press [DVD] first.  
Using [SKIP j ] / [SKIP i ]  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [SKIP i] to skip the  
current track/file and move to the next.  
1)During playback, press [SKIP i ] to skip the  
current title or chapter and move to the next.  
The track/file will move forward one at a time.  
To go back to the beginning of the current track/file,  
press [SKIP j ].  
(For JPEG files, press it once to go to the previous file.)  
Press it twice in quick successions to go to the previous  
track/file. The track/file will move backward one at a  
time.  
The title or chapter will move forward by one at a time.  
• If there is no chapter in one title, the current title will  
be skipped.  
To go back to the beginning of the current title or  
chapter, press [SKIP j ].  
Press it twice in quick successions to go to the previous  
title or chapter. The title or chapter will move  
backward one title at a time.  
Using [DISPLAY]  
Press [DVD] first.  
Using [DISPLAY]  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY].  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY] to bring up the  
display menu.  
If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
e.g.) DVD-video  
, then press [ENTER].  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
e.g.) audio CD  
, then press [ENTER].  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
1/  
5
0:00:15 / 0:05:00  
CD  
e.g.) MP3 files  
The number next to  
3)Title:  
will be highlighted.  
1/  
5
0:00:15  
MP3  
Use [K / L] or [the Number buttons] to enter a  
desired title number to search, then press [ENTER].  
Title search will start.  
The number next to  
will be highlighted.  
Chapter:  
Press [B] to move to the number next to  
chapter.  
Use [K / L] or [the Number buttons] to enter a  
desired chapter number to search, then press  
[ENTER].  
for  
3)Use [K / L] or [the Number buttons] to enter a  
desired track/file number to search, then press  
[ENTER].  
After the search, playback will start automatically.  
After the search, playback will start automatically.  
Note  
• During CD playback, you can enter a track number  
directly using [the Number buttons] for track search  
without displaying the menu.  
Note  
• In search mode display, total numbers of each search  
contents (title/chapter/time) are shown as a  
denominator.  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
total number  
of titles  
total time  
of the title  
total number  
of chapters  
74 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 74  
2009/04/03 15:38:57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEARCH  
Time Search  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY] to bring up the  
display menu.  
If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
, then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) DVD-video  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
e.g.) audio CD  
1/  
5
0:00:15 / 0:05:00  
CD  
The number next to  
will be highlighted.  
To move to the number next to  
, press [B].  
When time search is not available,  
counter are not displayed.  
and time  
3)Use [K / L / { / B] or [the Number buttons] to  
enter a desired time to search, then press [ENTER].  
After the search, playback will start automatically.  
Note  
• Time search is available only in the same track, file or  
title.  
EN 75  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 75  
2009/04/03 15:39:01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/SLIDE SHOW  
Title:  
Repeat Playback  
The current title will be played back repeatedly.  
Chapter:  
Available repeat function may vary depending the discs.  
The current chapter will be played back repeatedly.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY] or [REPEAT] to  
bring up the display menu.  
If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.  
All:  
The current disc will be played back repeatedly.  
A-B:  
Desired section can be played back repeatedly.  
1) Use [K / L] to select “A-B”, then press [ENTER].  
• If you press [REPEAT], skip to step 3.  
2) Press [ENTER] at the desired starting point A.  
3) Press [ENTER] at the desired ending point B.  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
menu.  
to display the selection  
Track:  
The current track or file will be played back repeatedly.  
Group:  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
The current folder will be played back repeatedly.  
Note  
3)Use [K / L] to select a desired option to repeat,  
then press [ENTER].  
The selected repeat playback will start.  
• Point B for the repeat A-B playback should be set  
within the same title or track of point A.  
•
To cancel the repeat playback, select “OFF” at step 3. The  
repeat setting will also be canceled when you stop playback.  
e.g.) DVD-video  
• You cannot select “Group” during the random  
playback of MP3/WMA/JPEG files.  
• For some DivX® files, A-B repeat playback may not  
function.  
• Chapter/Track repeat will be canceled whenever a  
Chapter/Track is skipped forward or backward.  
• During the A-B repeat, if you reaches the point A  
with any reverse playback, the reverse playback will  
be canceled and the A-B repeat playback resumes  
from point A.  
OFF  
Title  
Chapter  
A - B  
e.g.) audio CD  
OFF  
Track  
All  
A - B  
Random Playback  
e.g.) MP3/WMA/JPEG files  
OFF  
Track  
All  
Group  
You can play back a disc randomly instead of playing  
back in the original order.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
e.g.) DivX® files  
2)Use [K / L] to select “DISC Playback Mode”, then  
press [ENTER].  
OFF  
Track  
All  
Group  
A - B  
“DISC Playback Mode” menu will appear.  
For MP3/WMA, use [K / L] to select “Music”, then press  
[ENTER].  
For JPEG, use [K / L] to select “Photo”, then press  
[ENTER].  
3)Use [K / L] to select “Random Play”, then press  
[ENTER].  
Random playback will start.  
e.g.) audio CD  
1/  
5
0:00:15 / 0:05:00  
CD  
Random  
Note  
• To cancel random playback, press [STOP C] twice  
during random playback. “OFF” appears on the  
display menu.  
76 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 76  
2009/04/03 15:39:03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REPEAT/RANDOM/PROGRAM PLAYBACK/SLIDE SHOW  
Program Playback  
Slide Show  
You can program the disc to play back in your desired  
order.  
You can select the display time between 5 seconds and  
10 seconds.  
Press [DVD] first.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)Press [SETUP] in stop mode.  
1)Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Program Playback” on the  
left.  
2)Use [K / L] to select “DISC Playback Mode”, then  
press [ENTER].  
2)Use [K / L] to select “Photo”, then press [ENTER].  
“DISC Playback Mode” menu will appear.  
3)Use [K / L] to select “Slide Show”, then press  
[ENTER].  
3)Use [K / L] to select “Program Play”, then press  
[ENTER].  
4)Use [K / L] to select the display time, then press  
[ENTER].  
4)Use [K / L] to select a desired track, then press  
[ENTER] or [B].  
5)Press [SETUP] to exit.  
DISC Playback Mode  
Program Play  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
Note  
• Large-size JPEG files take a few moments to be  
displayed.  
Total 0:00:00  
Repeat this step until you program all the desired  
tracks.  
5)Press [PLAY B].  
DISC Playback Mode  
Program Play  
09 04 10 06 --  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
Total 0:31:07  
Program playback will start.  
Note  
• To erase tracks you selected, press [CLEAR] at step 4.  
• You can make program settings up to 50 tracks.  
• To cancel program playback, press [STOP C] twice  
during program playback. “OFF” appears on the TV  
screen.  
• You may also select a desired track using [the  
Number buttons] at step 4.  
EN 77  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 77  
2009/04/03 15:39:05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO  
You can select the format of audio and video as you prefer depending on the contents of the disc you are playing back.  
Switching Subtitles  
Switching Audio Soundtrack  
DVD-video may have subtitles in one or more languages.  
Available subtitle languages can be found on the disc  
case. You can switch subtitle languages during playback.  
When playing back a DVD-video recorded with 2 or more  
soundtracks (these are often in different languages), you  
can switch them during playback.  
When playing back audio CD, you can switch “L/R”(stereo),  
“L”(left) or “R”(right).  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY].  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY] or [AUDIO ] to  
bring up the display menu.  
If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
menu.  
e.g.) DVD-video  
to display the selection  
• If you press [AUDIO ], skip to step 3.  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
to display the selection  
menu.  
3)Use [K / L] to select a desired audio soundtrack or  
audio channel, then press [ENTER].  
3)Use [K / L] to select a desired subtitle language,  
For DVD-video, VR mode DVD-RW, or DivX® files  
• Audio soundtrack will switch.  
e.g.) DVD-video  
then press [ENTER].  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
OFF  
1.English  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
1.Dolby Digital 2ch English  
2.Dolby Digital 5.1ch English  
Subtitle will be displayed in the selected language.  
When “OFF” is selected, subtitle will disappear.  
• If the title contains both main and sub audio, you can  
further select “L“ (main), “R“ (sub), “L/R“ (mixed of  
main and sub).  
For audio CD  
• Audio channel will switch.  
e.g.) audio CD  
Note  
• Some discs will only allow you to change the subtitle  
from the disc menu. Press [DISC MENU] or [TOP  
MENU] to display the disc menu.  
• If a 4-digit language code appears in the subtitle  
menu, refer to the “LANGUAGE CODE” on page 118.  
• For disc with DivX® files, the TV screen only displays  
the number of subtitle languages and “- - - -“ next to  
the numbers.  
1/  
5
0:00:15 / 0:05:00  
CD  
1. L/R  
2. L  
3. R  
Note  
• Some discs will only allow you to change the  
soundtrack from the disc menu. Press [DISC MENU]  
or [TOP MENU] to display the disc menu.  
78 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 78  
2009/04/03 15:39:06  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO  
Switching Virtual Surround System  
Switching Camera Angles  
Some DVD-video have scenes shot from two or more  
angles. Angle information should be on the disc case if  
the disc contains multi-angle scenes.  
You can enjoy stereophonic virtual space through your  
existing 2 channel stereo system.  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY].  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY] to bring up the  
display menu.  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
, then press [ENTER].  
If the display menu is already shown, skip to step 2.  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
to display the selection  
menu.  
e.g.) DVD-video  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
Angle icon appears when a switching camera angle is available.  
Angle will switch each time you press [ENTER].  
3)Use [K / L] to select “OFF”, “Type 1” or “Type 2”,  
then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) DVD-video  
Note  
• Angle icon does not appear on the TV screen if you  
set “Angle Icon” to “OFF” in “Playback” menu.  
Refer to page 102.  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Reducing Block Noise  
OFF  
: no effect  
Type 1 : natural effect  
Type 2 : emphasized effect  
Press [DVD] first.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY].  
Note  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
to display the selection  
• Select “OFF” if sound is distorted.  
menu.  
e.g.) DVD-video  
• The setting will be kept when the unit is turned off.  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
3)Use  
[K  
/
L]  
to, select “Noise Reduction”, then press [ENTER].  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
Noise Reduction OFF  
Black Level OFF  
4)Use [  
K
/
L] to select a desired option, then press [ENTER].  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
OFF  
Type 1  
Type 2  
Your setting will be activated.  
This function reduces noise in the playback picture. If  
noises appear on the TV screen during playing back  
discs recorded in long time recording mode such as EP  
or SLP, select “Type 1” or “Type 2”.  
(“Type 2” is more effective.)  
When playing back discs with a few noises such as  
DVD-video, select “OFF”.  
EN 79  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 79  
2009/04/03 15:39:08  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING THE FORMAT OF AUDIO AND VIDEO  
Adjusting Black Level  
You can adjust the black level to control the brightness  
of the picture in order to get a better picture.  
1)During playback, press [DISPLAY].  
2)Use [{ / B] to select  
to display the selection  
menu.  
e.g.) DVD-video  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
3)Use [K / L] to select “Black Level”, then press  
[ENTER].  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
Noise Reduction OFF  
Black Level OFF  
4)Use [K / L] to select “OFF” or “ON”, then press  
[ENTER].  
Your setting will be activated.  
1/  
5
1/  
5
0:01:00 / 1:23:45  
DVD Video  
OFF  
ON  
OFF : Shows the original picture as recorded.  
ON  
: Make the darker parts of the picture more  
visible.  
Note  
• You can adjust black level setting only during  
playback.  
• The setting will be kept even when the unit is turned  
off.  
• The default setting is “ON”.  
80 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 80  
2009/04/03 15:39:13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INFORMATION ON DISC EDITING  
Guide to a Title List  
Editing Discs  
Title list allows you to check the titles recorded on the  
disc easily. You can choose a title to play back from this  
list and easily edit the titles as you prefer.  
Edit the recorded disc  
You will find editing discs is easy. This unit offers  
convenient edit functions which are possible only with  
DVD-RW/-R and DVD+RW/+R.  
You can edit the following from a title list.  
• Assigning a name to a title  
• Dividing a title  
Press [TOP MENU].  
4
5
6
Title List  
ORG  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1:00AM (2:00:00)  
JAN/ 1/09  
CH10 LP  
1
2
3
6
• Combining titles  
• Adding titles to a playlist  
• Erasing all playlist  
4
5
• Setting or releasing the title protection  
• Adding or deleting chapter marks  
• Deleting titles or parts of titles  
1 / 2  
3
2 1  
3
(Possible editing functions depend on the recording  
format and editing method.)  
Edit  
ORG  
Original and playlist (VR mode)  
For VR mode DVD-RW, you can edit the recordings in  
playlist without changing the original recordings. Playlist  
does not take up much disc space. After you make a  
recording to VR mode DVD-RW, a playlist will be created  
automatically.  
Scene Delete  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Protect  
2
What “Original” or “Playlist” is for?  
JAN/31/09 11:00PM CH13 LP  
0 : 00 : 59  
Throughout this manual, you will find original and playlist  
which refer to the actual content and the edited version.  
11 10  
9
8
7
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded on  
the VR mode DVD-RW.  
• Playlist content refers to the edited version of the VR  
mode DVD-RW; how the original content is to be played  
back.  
1. Title list: List of the titles recorded on the disc, and  
their information.  
• For DVD+RW/+R, empty title always appears at the  
last of the title list.  
• For the titles being blocked by the v-chip system  
(except the downloaded ratings), “BLOCK” will be  
displayed and you cannot watch the contents.  
2. The protect icon: Appears when the title has been  
protected. (Original titles only)  
3. Arrow: Indicating there is a previous / next page.  
Finalizing a disc  
• This will allow a disc that is recorded on this unit to be  
played back on other DVD player — without finalization  
it will not be playable on other DVD player.  
• After finalizing a DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, you cannot edit  
any information that is on that disc.  
• If you have recorded in DVD+RW, then editing is still  
permitted after finalizing.  
4. Title list icon: Indicates a type of the displayed title  
list.  
: VR (Original)  
: VR (Playlist)  
5. Title name  
: +VR mode  
: Video mode  
ORG  
+VR  
Using these editing functions to modify copyrighted  
content for any purpose other than your private viewing  
may be prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the  
United States and other countries, and may subject you  
to civil and criminal liability.  
PL  
Video  
6. Title information: Displays various information on  
the selected title.  
7. Submenu: Submenus for the selected menu are  
displayed here.  
8. Title name (editable): If you do not name the title,  
the recorded date, time, channel and the recording  
mode are displayed here.  
9. Progress bar: Indicating the progress of the playback.  
The vertical lines in the bar indicates chapter marks,  
and “L” sliding on the bar indicates current point of  
playback displayed in the preview window.  
10. Preview window: Preview of the selected title is  
displayed here.  
11. Playback status: Indicating the current playback  
status of the selected title.  
Press [RETURN] to exit the title list.  
EN 81  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 81  
2009/04/03 15:39:15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DELETING TITLES  
Notes for deleting titles  
After the disc is fully recorded:  
DVD-RW/DVD+RW  
DVD-R/DVD+R  
• When a title is deleted from  
• When the last title is deleted from  
DVD-RW in video mode or DVD+RW, the  
recordable space will be increased.  
• When a title is deleted from  
DVD-R and DVD+R, the  
recordable space will NOT be  
DVD-RW in VR mode, the  
recordable disc space will  
be increased.  
increased.  
The Full-Recorded disc  
The Full-Recorded disc  
The Full-Recorded disc  
Delete!  
Delete!  
Delete!  
Delete!  
Deleted title  
cannot create  
the space.  
You cannot  
record  
a new title.  
You cannot  
record  
a new title.  
You can record  
a new title.  
You can record  
a new title.  
Once all editings are made, press [RETURN] several times to exit the editing mode. “Writing to Disc” appears  
momentarily. It also appears when pressing [AOPEN/CLOSE] or [I/y ON/STANDBY] before exiting the editing  
mode after editing.  
Note  
• If you delete the title in DVD+RW, deleted title will be displayed as “Empty”.  
• You cannot overwrite on the “Empty”  
• For DVD+RW, if “Empty” appears right next to the other “Empty”, those “Empty” combines into one.  
Title List  
Title List  
+VR  
+VR  
JAN/21/09 7:00AM CH22 SLP  
EMPTY TITLE  
7:00AM (2:00:00)  
JAN/21/09  
SLP  
1
2
3
6
1
4
2
3
1Delete the  
title No.5  
4
5
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
1 / 1  
1 / 1  
82 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 82  
2009/04/03 15:39:16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DELETING TITLES  
Press [DVD].  
You can delete titles which you do not need anymore.  
Please be advised that the titles once deleted cannot be  
brought back to the disc.  
Be sure to read “Notes for deleting titles” on page 82 before  
you delete the title.  
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].  
Title list, original or playlist will appear.  
• For VR mode DVD-RW, press [DISC MENU] to  
switch between “Original” and “Playlist”.  
1
2
Use [K / L/s / B] to select a desired  
title, then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Title List  
ORG  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1:00AM (2:00:00)  
JAN/ 1/09  
CH10 LP  
1
2
3
6
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
4
5
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
1 / 2  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Use [K / L] to select “Title Delete”,  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
then press [ENTER].  
3
4
Play From Start  
Edit  
Title Delete  
Add To Playlist  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
Delete this title?  
Yes  
No  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
After that, “Are you sure?” will appear, select  
“Yes” and then press [ENTER].  
Title will be deleted.  
SE-R0294  
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
5
Writing to Disc  
90%  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
EN 83  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 83  
2009/04/03 15:39:17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST  
Adding Titles to a Playlist  
Playlist  
Follow the step 1 in “DELETING  
TITLES” on page 83 to display the  
original.  
For VR mode DVD-RW, you can create the playlist as you  
wish.  
You can add up to 99 titles to a playlist (as long as  
the total number of the playlist does not exceed 999  
chapters).  
1
Use [K / L/s / B] to select the  
desired title, then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
2
3
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “Add To  
Playlist”, then press [ENTER].  
CH  
Play From Start  
Edit  
Title Delete  
Add To Playlist  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
[ENTER].  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
4
5
Create a Playlist ?  
Yes  
No  
ENTER  
The title is added to playlist.  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
Note  
• To delete a title from the playlist, follow the steps in  
“DELETING TITLES” on page 83.  
• To delete all titles in the playlist, refer to “Erasing All  
Playlist” on page 85.  
• When a playlist contains 99 titles or more, or 999  
chapters or more, “Add to Playlist” cannot be  
selected.  
84 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 84  
2009/04/03 15:39:20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CREATING/DELETING PLAYLIST  
Erasing All Playlist  
Press [DVD].  
Playlist  
Press [SETUP].  
A playlist can be deleted if it is no longer needed.  
Main menu will appear.  
1
2
3
Use [K / L] to select “DVD Menu”,  
then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “Delete All  
Playlists”, then press [ENTER].  
DVD Menu  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
Format  
Finalize  
TIMER  
PROG.  
Disc Protect OFF  
ON  
SPACE  
Delete All Playlists  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
4
Delete entire playlist?  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Yes  
No  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
“Are you sure?” will appear.  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes” and then press  
[ENTER].  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DVD Menu  
Format  
Finalize  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
Disc Protect OFF  
Delete All Playl
Areyousure?
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Yes  
No  
SE-R0294  
Playlist is deleted.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
Note  
• Deleting a playlist will not increase the available  
recording time on the disc.  
EN 85  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 85  
2009/04/03 15:39:22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Putting Names on Titles  
You can put a name on the title and change it from this  
menu.  
Use [K / L] to select “Edit Title  
Name”, then press [ENTER].  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
4
5
Edit  
ORG  
Scene Delete  
1
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Protect  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
To enter a title name, follow the  
steps of “Guide to Edit Title Name”  
on page 87.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Edit - Edit Title Name  
ORG  
PAUSE  
VCR  
A
a
B
b
2
!
C
c
3
?
1
character set  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
1
@
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
M
1 : 25 : 47  
SE-R0294  
area for entering title names  
When you finish entering a title name, press  
[ENTER].  
Press [DVD].  
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].  
Title list, original or playlist will appear.  
• For VR mode DVD-RW, press [DISC MENU] to  
switch between “Original” and “Playlist”.  
1
2
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
6
7
Edit - Edit Title Name  
ORG  
Yes  
1
Use [K / L/s / B] to select a desired  
title, then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original  
No  
Title List  
ORG  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
MY FAVORITE  
1:00AM (2:00:00)  
JAN/ 1/09  
CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
1
2
3
6
The name you entered will be activated for the title.  
4
5
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or  
[STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
1 / 2  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
Use [K / L] to select “Edit”, then press  
[ENTER].  
3
Play From Start  
Edit  
Title Delete  
Add To Playlist  
.
86 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 86  
2009/04/03 15:39:24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Putting Names on Titles (cont’d)  
Guide to Edit Title Name  
1)Use [K / L] to select a desired character set, then  
press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
2)Follow the list below, use [the Number buttons]  
repeatedly until the desired letter appears.  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Select  
ABC  
abc  
123  
@ ! ?  
Press  
CH  
<space>  
<space>  
<space>  
0
PQRS  
TUV  
! ”# $ % & ’( )  
+ , - . / : ; < = >  
? @ [ ] ^ _ { | }  
*
(*1)  
(*1)  
1
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ABC  
DEF  
abc  
def  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
GHI  
ghi  
ENTER  
JKL  
jkl  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
mno  
pqrs  
tuv  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
wxyz  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
*1 Press  
, character set will be changed to the “ @!? ”  
mode automatically.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
• To delete letters, press [CLEAR] repeatedly.  
Press and hold [CLEAR] to delete all letters.  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
• Use [s / B] to move the cursor to the left and right.  
• You can enter up to 30 letters.  
SE-R0294  
Note  
• Undefined letters in a title name are shown by “*”. If  
you delete them, adjoining letters may change to “*”  
or other.  
EN 87  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 87  
2009/04/03 15:39:28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Setting Chapter Marks  
You can put chapter marks in each title. Once a chapter is  
marked, you can use it for the chapter search feature.  
Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Putting Names  
on Titles” on page 86 to display “Edit”  
menu.  
1
2
3
OPEN/  
INPUT  
Use [K / L] to select “Chapter Mark”,  
then press [ENTER].  
Submenu will appear.  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
Use [SKIP H / G],  
[REV E], [FWD D], [PLAY B] and  
[PAUSE F] to find the point where  
you will create a new chapter mark.  
Or, use [SKIP H / G] to find a  
chapter mark that you wish to delete.  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Use [K / L] to select “Add” or  
“Delete”, then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW original  
ENTER  
4
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Edit - Chapter Mark  
ORG  
Add  
1
Delete  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Chapter  
2 / 3  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
PAUSE  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
If you select “Add” at step 4, a new chapter mark  
will be added, and if you select “Delete” at step  
4, the chapter mark will be deleted.  
5
SE-R0294  
e.g.) Add  
Edit - Chapter Mark - Add  
ORG  
Yes  
1
No  
Chapter  
2 / 3  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
A new chapter mark will be added.  
Note  
Press [RETURN].  
• Maximum numbers of chapter for each DVD:  
VR mode DVD : 999 chapters per entire original  
and playlist  
6
7
+VR mode DVD : 254 chapters per disc, 99 chapters  
per title  
• Besides the above-mentioned, it is not likely to be  
able to add according to recorded time and number  
of chapters.  
Press [RETURN] again and then  
[RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
88 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 88  
2009/04/03 15:39:30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Hiding Chapters  
Use [K / L/s / B] to select a desired  
You can hide chapters from the title list.  
Hidden chapters are skipped during playback.  
title, then press [ENTER].  
2
3
Title List  
+VR  
JAN/15/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1:00AM (2:00:00)  
JAN/15/09  
CH10 LP  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
1
2
3
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
4
5
6
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
1 / 2  
PQRS  
TUV  
Use [K / L] to select “Edit”, then  
press [ENTER].  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Play From Start  
Edit  
Title Delete  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
Use [K / L] to select “Hide Chapter”,  
then press [ENTER].  
Submenu will appear.  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
4
5
6
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
SKIP  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
PLAY  
Use [SKIP H] or [SKIP G] to decide  
the chapter to be hidden.  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
Use [K / L] to select “Hidden”, then  
press [ENTER].  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
Edit - Hide Chapter  
+VR  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Visible  
1
Hidden  
Chapter 2 / 3 Hidden  
Press [DVD].  
JAN/15/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].  
Title list will appear.  
1
After this operation is completed,  
press [RETURN] thrice to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
Note  
7
• ”Hidden” will be displayed in the preview window  
while previewing the hidden chapter.  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
• When you make all chapters in the title “Hidden”,  
“Hidden” is displayed in a thumbnail of the title list.  
Title List  
+VR  
If you want hidden chapters to be “Visible”,  
select the chapter to be shown. Then use  
[K / L] to select “Visible”, then press [ENTER]  
at the step 6 above.  
JAN/15/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
--:-- (2:00:00)  
Hidden  
---/--/--  
LP  
1
4
2
3
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
Empty  
1 / 1  
EN 89  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 89  
2009/04/03 15:39:33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Deleting a Part of a Title  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Putting  
Names on Titles” on page 86 to display  
“Edit” menu.  
You can delete a specific part of a title.  
Even when parts of title are deleted from the playlist, the  
original title will remain as it is.  
1
2
OPEN/  
INPUT  
Use [K / L] to select “Scene Delete”,  
then press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW playlist.  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Edit  
PL  
CH  
Scene Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Title Dividing  
Title Combining  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
Note  
• When a scene is deleted from an original, the playlist  
related to the original will be deleted.  
• You cannot select “Scene Delete” if the number of  
chapter marks in the original or playlist is more than  
999. (Depends on the content, there is a case that  
you cannot select “Scene Delete” before the number  
of chapter marks reaches 999.)  
• The recordable disc space will not increase even after  
deleting a part of a title on the playlist.  
90 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 90  
2009/04/03 15:39:36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Deleting a Part of a Title (cont’d)  
Use [SKIP H / G],  
Use [K / L] to select “Delete” then  
press [ENTER].  
[REV E], [FWD D], [PLAY B] and  
[PAUSE F] to find the start point,  
then press [ENTER].  
3
4
5
Edit - Scene Delete  
PL  
Start  
1
End  
Edit - Scene Delete  
PL  
Preview  
Delete  
Start  
1
End  
Preview  
Delete  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 47 : 00  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes” then press  
[ENTER].  
Then use [SKIP H / G],  
“Are you sure?” will appear. Select “Yes” using  
[REV E], [FWD D], [PLAY B] and  
[PAUSE F] again to move to the end  
point, and press [ENTER].  
[K / L] and then press [ENTER].  
Edit - Scene Delete  
PL  
Are you sure?  
1
Yes  
Edit - Scene Delete  
PL  
No  
Start  
1
End  
Preview  
Delete  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 50 : 00  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 45 : 00  
The part of the title is deleted.  
The cursor will move to “Preview”.  
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or  
[STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the  
total and the elapsed time of the title, and the  
area selected for deletion is indicated in red.  
You can check the preview by pressing [ENTER].  
• Before and after 5 seconds of the deleted point  
will be playback for preview.  
6
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
start point end point  
Before  
editing  
Edited  
EN 91  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 91  
2009/04/03 15:39:38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Dividing a Title  
Playlist  
Use [K / L] to select “Edit”, then  
press [ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW playlist  
You can divide one title into two new titles.  
3
4
Play From Start  
Edit  
Title Delete  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [SKIP H], [SKIP G], [REV E],  
[FWD D], [PAUSE F] and [PLAY B]  
to decide the point at which you will  
divide the title.  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Use [K / L] to select “Title Dividing”,  
then press [ENTER].  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
5
6
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
e.g.) VR mode DVD-RW playlist  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Edit - Title Dividing  
PL  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Yes  
1
No  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
The title will be divided into two new titles.  
Both title names are identical.  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
For DVD+RW: Data will be written onto the disc  
momentarily.  
SE-R0294  
Writing to Disc  
90%  
Press [DVD].  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
In stop mode, press [TOP MENU].  
• For VR mode DVD-RW, press [DISC MENU] to  
select “Playlist”.  
1
For VR mode DVD-RW: Proceed to step 7.  
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.  
Use [K / L/s / B] to select a desired  
title, then press [ENTER].  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
7
2
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
Note  
• You cannot divide a title of the disc when the  
number of recording titles reaches the maximum of  
99 (-RW) or 49 (+RW), and the number of recording  
chapters reaches the maximum of 999 (-RW) or 254  
(+RW).  
92 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 92  
2009/04/03 15:39:39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Combining Titles  
Playlist  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Dividing a  
Title” on page 92 to display “Edit”  
menu.  
You can combine two titles into a single title.  
1
2
Use [K / L] to select “Title  
Combining”, then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Edit  
PL  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Scene Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Title Dividing  
Title Combining  
CH  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Title combining setting window will appear.  
Selected title grays out, and the frame of the  
next title becomes yellow.  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Edit - Title Combining  
PL  
JAN/31/09 12:00PM CH13 LP  
12:00PM (0:30:00) JAN/31/09  
ENTER  
CH13 LP  
1
2
3
6
CLEAR  
RETURN  
1 +  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
4
5
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
1 / 6  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Use [K / L / { / B] to select another  
title to combine, then press [ENTER].  
Selection menu will appear.  
PAUSE  
VCR  
3
4
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Combine selected titles?  
SE-R0294  
Yes  
No  
The two titles will combine into a single title.  
Title List  
PL  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1:00AM (2:30:00)  
JAN/ 1/09  
CH10 LP  
1
2
3
6
4
5
1 / 6  
Press [RETURN] or [STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
Note  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
5
• You cannot select the same title twice and combine  
it into a single title.  
• If either one of the two original titles is deleted, the  
combined new title is also deleted.  
EN 93  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 93  
2009/04/03 15:39:43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Setting or Releasing the Title Protection  
Original  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Putting  
Names on Titles” on page 86 to display  
“Edit” menu.  
To prevent the accidental editing, or erasing of the titles,  
you can protect them in “Edit” menu.  
You can cancel the title protection feature after it is  
applied.  
1
2
Use [K / L] to select “Protect”, then  
press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
Edit  
ORG  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Scene Delete  
1
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
Protect  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
• If the title is protected,  
the original list.  
icon will appear in  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Confirm the indication  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
“OFF ON”. Press [ENTER] again.  
• If the title is already protected, “ON OFF” will  
appear. If you press [ENTER], the title will be  
released from protection.  
3
4
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Edit - Protect  
ORG  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
OFF  
ON  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
1
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH10 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
PAUSE  
VCR  
•
icon will appear on the title in the original  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
list.  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or  
[STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
SE-R0294  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
To protect a whole disc  
(VR mode DVD-RW, DVD+RW/+R  
only):  
Select “Disc Protect OFF ON” from the DVD  
Menu, then select “Yes”.  
Refer to “SETTING A DISC TO PROTECT” on  
page 41.  
94 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 94  
2009/04/03 15:39:45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING DISCS  
Setting or Clearing All Chapter Marks at Once  
Follow the steps 1 to 3 in “Putting  
Names on Titles” on page 86 to display  
“Edit” menu.  
For titles in video mode DVD-RW, you can set or edit  
chapter at every time interval. You can clear the chapter  
mark too.  
You can specify the interval of chapter marks for titles last  
more than 5 minutes.  
1
2
Use [K / L] to select “Chapter Mark”,  
then press [ENTER].  
Edit  
Video  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Edit Title Name  
Chapter Mark  
1
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH8 LP  
PQRS  
TUV  
1 : 25 : 47  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Use [K / L] to select the desired  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
interval, then press [ENTER].  
3
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Edit - Chapter Mark  
Video  
OFF  
1
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
JAN/ 1/09 1:00AM CH8 LP  
1 : 25 : 47  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press  
[ENTER].  
Chapter marks are added.  
If you select “OFF” at step 3, all the chapter  
marks are erased.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
4
5
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Press [RETURN] and then [RETURN] or  
[STOP C] to exit.  
Data will be written onto the disc momentarily.  
SE-R0294  
This operation may take  
awhile to be completed.  
Note  
• You cannot select a chapter mark interval that  
exceeds the length of a title.  
• The length of chapters may slightly deviate from the  
one specified at the step 3.  
• A chapter mark may be delayed depending on the  
recording content.  
• Maximum number of chapter for video mode DVD is  
99 chapters per title.  
• The interval for auto chapter may be up to two  
minutes different from the time option you set.  
EN 95  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 95  
2009/04/03 15:39:48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS  
The following table is the contents which you can set and the default settings.  
Refer to the following table for useful operation.  
Setup  
Playback  
Items (highlight is the default)  
Parental Lock  
→ page 100  
Contents  
Set the parental level for DVD playback.  
OFF  
level 8 [Adult] to  
1 [Kid Safe]  
Audio Out Dynamic Range Control  
→ page 101  
Compressing the range of sound volume.  
ON  
OFF  
PCM  
Set whether the sound recorded in 96kHz will be  
down sampled to 48kHz.  
48kHz  
96kHz  
PCM  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
Set the type of sound signal which outputs from  
the digital audio output jack.  
Stream  
Set whether DTS signal is output or not.  
ON  
OFF  
Disc Menu Language  
→ page 102  
Set the language for disc menu language.  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Audio Language  
→ page 102  
Set the language for audio.  
Original  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Subtitle Language  
→ page 102  
Set the language for subtitles.  
OFF  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Angle Icon  
Set whether to display the angle icon or not.  
Set the type of still image in pausing playback.  
ON  
OFF  
→ page 102  
Still Mode  
→ page 102  
Auto  
Field  
Frame  
Display  
OSD Language  
Set the language for OSD (on-screen display).  
Set the idling time before the screen saver starts.  
English  
Français  
Español  
OFF  
1 minute  
5 minutes  
→ page 103  
Screen Saver  
→ page 103  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
Auto  
Bright  
Dark  
FL Dimmer  
Set the brightness of the front panel display.  
Set the type of the DTV closed caption.  
→ page 103  
DTV CC  
Caption Service  
→ page 36  
OFF  
Service1  
Service2  
Service3  
Service4  
Service5  
Service6  
Recording  
→ page 46  
ON  
OFF  
Set whether to record the DTV closed caption or  
not.  
CC Style  
User Setting  
→ page 37  
ON  
OFF  
Set the CC style setting whether or not is effective.  
Font Size  
→ page 38  
Set font size of the displayed caption.  
Large  
Middle  
Small  
Font Style  
→ page 38  
Set font style of the displayed caption.  
Style1  
Style2  
Style3  
Style4  
Style5  
Style6  
Style7  
Style8  
96 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 96  
2009/04/03 15:39:49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS  
Setup  
Display  
Items (highlight is the default)  
CC Style  
Contents  
Font Opacity  
→ page 38  
Set the font opacity of the displayed caption.  
Solid  
Transparent  
Translucent  
Flash  
Font Color  
→ page 38  
Set the font color of the displayed caption.  
White  
Black  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
Edge Type  
Set edge type of the displayed caption.  
Set edge color of the displayed caption.  
None  
Raised  
Depressed  
Uniform  
L.Shadow  
R.Shadow  
White  
Black  
Red  
→ page 38  
Edge Color  
→ page 38  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
Back Opacity  
Set back opacity of the displayed caption.  
Set back color of the displayed caption.  
Solid  
→ page 38  
Transparent  
Translucent  
Flash  
White  
Black  
Red  
Back Color  
→ page 38  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Magenta  
Cyan  
V-Chip  
MPAA Rating  
→ page 104  
X
Set the viewing limitation according to US movie  
ratings.  
NC-17  
R
PG-13  
PG  
G
NR  
TV Rating  
→ page 104  
TV-MA  
TV-14  
TV-PG  
TV-G  
Set the viewing limitation according to US TV  
program ratings.  
TV-Y7  
TV-Y  
None  
Canadian English Rating 18+  
Set the viewing limitation according to Canadian  
English language ratings.  
→ page 104  
14+  
PG  
G
C8+  
C
E
Canadian French Rating 18ans+  
Set the viewing limitation according to Canadian  
French language ratings.  
→ page 105  
16ans+  
13ans+  
8ans+  
G
E
Downloadable Rating  
→ page 105  
Block Setting  
Clear  
Downloadable Rating  
To set the rating.  
Clear the downloadable rating information and its  
setting.  
Change Password  
→ page 105  
Change the password.  
Video  
Progressive  
→ page 106  
ON  
OFF  
Set to the progressive scan mode (set to "ON") or  
to the interlace scan mode (set to "OFF").  
EN 97  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 97  
2009/04/03 15:39:50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIST OF THE DEFAULT SETTINGS  
Setup  
Video  
Items (highlight is the default)  
TV Aspect  
Contents  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Pan & Scan  
16:9 Wide  
Set a picture size according to aspect ratio of your  
TV.  
→ page 106  
Select Video - L1(Rear)  
→ page 55  
Set the video input type to match the external  
input.  
Video In  
S-Video In  
Recording  
Auto Chapter  
→ page 46  
OFF  
5 minutes  
Insert chapter marks at even time interval.  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
30 minutes  
60 minutes  
Recording Audio Select (XP)  
→ page 47  
PCM  
Dolby Digital  
Set the recording audio type. (Only when the rec  
mode is set to XP.)  
Auto  
Disc Full  
ON  
Set the unit to finalize the disc automatically.  
Finalize  
→ page 42  
OFF  
ON  
End of Timer Rec  
OFF  
Aspect Ratio (Video mode)  
Set a aspect ratio for video mode recording.  
Set the VCR to DVD (DVD to VCR) duplication.  
Auto  
4:3  
→ page 47  
16:9  
Dubbing Mode  
→ pages 60-61  
VCR DVD  
DVD VCR  
Make Recording Compatible  
→ page 46  
ON  
OFF  
Set to prohibit additional recording (OFF) or to  
replace the title list after recording (ON).  
Clock  
Set the clock.  
Clock Setting → page 32  
Auto Clock Setting  
→ page 30  
OFF  
Auto  
Set the clock automatically.  
Manual  
Daylight Saving Time  
Set the clock for the daylight saving time.  
Tune the channels automatically.  
ON(MAR-NOV)  
ON(APR-OCT)  
OFF  
Air  
Cable  
→ page 32  
Channel  
Auto Channnel Preset  
→ page 27  
Cable (Extended  
Scan)  
Tune the channels manually.  
Manual Channel Preset → pages 28-29  
TV Audio Select  
→ page 35  
Set the analog TV audio type for output and video  
mode or DVD+RW/+R recording.  
Stereo  
SAP  
DivX  
Provide DivX®VOD registration code.  
Set the language for DivX Subtitle.  
DivX®VOD → page 107  
DivX Subtitle  
→ page 107  
OFF  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Swedish  
Dutch  
Russian1  
Russian2  
Hungarian  
Polish  
Czech  
HDMI  
Format  
→ page 108  
Set the color space for the HDMI output.  
RGB  
YCbCr  
HDMI Audio  
→ page 109  
Set whether to output the HDMI audio signal or  
not.  
ON  
OFF  
RGB Range  
→ page 109  
Set the black-white contrast level for HDMI RGB  
output.  
Normal  
Enhanced  
Reset All  
→ page 110  
Yes  
No  
Set to the default setting.  
Note  
• Your change to each settings stays on even when the power is off.  
• An item which is not currently available is grayed in the settings.  
98 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 98  
2009/04/03 15:39:50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Playback  
Press [STOP C] if you are playing back a disc.  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting“, then press  
[ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
1
2
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
Use [K / L] to select “Playback”, then  
press [ENTER].  
PQRS  
TUV  
General Setting  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Playback  
Display  
Video  
Recording  
Clock  
Channel  
DivX  
HDMI  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Reset All  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,  
then press [ENTER].  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
3
Parental Lock  
Audio Out  
Disc Menu Language  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Angle Icon  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
Still Mode  
Submenu will appear.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Refer  
to  
on pages 100 to 102  
1
7
and set the selected item.  
4
5
SE-R0294  
When you finish with the setting,  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
EN 99  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 99  
2009/04/03 15:39:51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Playback (cont’d)  
Parental Lock (Default: OFF)  
A password has not been set yet.  
1
A
Some DVD-video feature a parental lock level. Playback  
will stop if the ratings exceed the levels you set, it will  
require you to enter a password before the disc will  
playback. This feature prevents your children from  
viewing inappropriate material.  
Use [K / L] to select “Yes”, then press [ENTER]. Use  
[the Number buttons] to enter a new password except  
for 4737, then press [ENTER].  
Change Password?  
Password Input  
Yes  
No  
Use [K / L] to select the desired level, then press  
[ENTER].  
Yes  
Your setting will be activated.  
Parental Lock  
OFF  
A password has been set already.  
B
8 [Adult]  
7 [NC 17]  
6 [R]  
• Use [the Number buttons] to enter the current  
5 [PG R]  
4 [PG 13]  
3 [PG]  
password.  
Password Input  
2 [G]  
1 [Kid Safe]  
If a password has not been set yet, proceed to  
If a password has been set already, proceed to  
.
A
B
Your setting will be activated.  
.
• If you want to change password, use [K / L] to select  
“Yes” then press [ENTER]. Use [the Number buttons]  
to enter a new password except for 4737, then press  
[ENTER].  
RATING EXPLANATIONS  
• OFF : Parental Control is inactive; all discs can play.  
• 8 [Adult]: DVD software of any grades (adult/general/  
children) can be played back.  
<change the password>  
Change Password?  
Password Input  
Yes  
No  
• 7 [NC 17]: No one under 17 admitted.  
• 6 [R]: Restricted; under 17 requires accompanying  
parent or adult guardian.  
Yes  
Your setting will be activated.  
• 5 [PG R]: Parental Guidance Recommended.  
• 4 [PG13]: Unsuitable for children under 13.  
• 3 [PG]: Parental Guidance suggested.  
• 2 [G]: General Audience.  
Note  
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered incorrectly.  
• When you forget the password or you want to clear  
all settings in “Parental Lock” menu, enter 4737 using  
[the Number buttons] in password input window.  
Password will be cleared and parental levels will be  
set to “OFF”.  
• 1 [Kid Safe]: Suitable for children.  
Note  
• Parental lock function may not be available to some  
discs.  
• With some DVD, it may be difficult to find if they are  
compatible with parental lock. Be sure to check if the  
parental lock function operates in the way that you  
have set.  
• Record the password in case you forget it.  
• If there is a DVD in the unit when you set up the  
parental lock, press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to activate the  
parental lock level.  
100 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 100  
2009/04/03 15:39:53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Playback (cont’d)  
Audio Out  
Settings for Dolby Digital (Default : Stream)  
2
C
Choose the appropriate audio setting for your external device.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
It will only affect a disc playback.  
Use [  
K
/
L] to select a desired item, then press [ENTER].  
Dolby Digital  
PCM  
Stream  
Audio Out  
A
Dynamic Range Control  
PCM  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
Your setting will be activated.  
B
PCM  
: Converts the Dolby Digital into PCM (2 channel).  
When your amplifier/decoder is NOT  
C
D
compatible with Dolby Digital, set to “PCM”.  
Stream : Outputs Dolby Digital signals.  
When your amplifier/decoder is compatible  
Dynamic Range Control (Default : ON)  
A
with Dolby Digital, set to “Stream”.  
Set to “ON” to compress the range between soft and loud sounds.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
Settings for DTS (Default : ON)  
D
Select a setting using [K / L], then press [ENTER].  
Dynamic Range Control  
ON  
OFF  
DTS  
ON  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
Note  
Your setting is activated.  
• Dynamic range control function is available only on  
the discs which are recorded in the Dolby Digital  
format.  
ON  
: Outputs DTS signals.  
If your amplifier / decoder is compatible with  
DTS, set to “ON”.  
OFF  
: No DTS signal is output.  
If your amplifier / decoder is NOT compatible  
with DTS, set to “OFF”.  
Settings for PCM (Default : 48kHz)  
B
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
PCM  
48kHz  
96kHz  
Your setting will be activated.  
48kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is NOT compatible  
with 96kHz PCM, select “48kHz”. 96kHz sound  
will be output in 48kHz.  
96kHz : If your amplifier/decoder is compatible with  
96kHz PCM, select “96kHz”. 96kHz sound will  
be output.  
Note  
When playing back disc with copyright protection  
• Even if you select “96kHz”, the sound will be down  
sampled at 48kHz.  
EN 101  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 101  
2009/04/03 15:39:54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Playback (cont’d)  
Disc Menu Language (Default : English)  
3
Note  
• Only the languages supported by the disc can be  
selected.  
Set the language for disc menu.  
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].  
• Audio language setting may not be available to  
some discs.  
Disc Menu Language  
• You can also change or switch off the subtitles on a  
DVD from the disc menu if it is available.  
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered incorrectly.  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Your setting will be activated.  
Angle Icon (Default : ON)  
6
Audio Language (Default : Original)  
4
Set to “ON” to show the angle icon during the playback.  
Set the audio language.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].  
Angle Icon  
Audio Language  
ON  
OFF  
Original  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Your setting will be activated.  
Still Mode (Default : Auto)  
7
Your setting will be activated.  
• When “Original” is selected, the audio language will be  
in the disc’s default language.  
Select “Auto” usually.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
Still Mode  
Subtitle Language (Default : OFF)  
5
Auto  
Field  
Frame  
Set the subtitle language.  
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].  
Your setting will be activated.  
Subtitle Language  
Auto  
: Optimum resolution setting (“Field” or  
“Frame”) will be selected.  
OFF  
English  
French  
Spanish  
Other  
Field  
: Images in the still mode will be stabilized.  
Frame : Images in the still mode will be highly defined.  
Note  
•
Your setting will be activated.  
Frame is one completed video image made up of two  
fields (There are 30 frames per second of NTSC video).  
If “Other” is selected for  
using [the Number buttons].  
to  
, press 4-digit code  
3
5
Code Input  
-
-
-
-
• When you finish entering the code, press [ENTER].  
Refer to the language code table on page 118.  
102 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 102  
2009/04/03 15:39:56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Display  
Press [SETUP] to exit.  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
4
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
OSD Language (Default : English)  
1
Set the language for the on-screen display.  
CH  
Use [K / L] to select a language, then press [ENTER].  
PQRS  
TUV  
OSD Language  
TIMER  
PROG.  
English  
Français  
Español  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
Your setting will be activated.  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Screen Saver (Default : 10 minutes)  
2
Set the time to activate the screen saver function on the  
TV screen.  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
Screen Saver  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
OFF  
1 minute  
5 minutes  
10 minutes  
15 minutes  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Your setting will be activated.  
PAUSE  
VCR  
FL Dimmer (Default: Bright)  
3
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
Set the front panel display brightness.  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
FL Dimmer  
Auto  
Bright  
Dark  
Press [STOP C] if you are playing back a disc.  
You can choose one from “Auto”, “Bright” or “Dark”.  
If “Auto” is selected, the display gets dark when the  
power is off.  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
DTV CC  
4
1
Refer to “DTV Closed Caption” and “Recording the DTV  
Closed Caption” on page 36 and 46.  
CC Style  
Use [K / L] to select “Display”, then  
press [ENTER].  
5
Refer to “Closed Caption Style“ on pages 37-38.  
2
3
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,  
then press [ENTER].  
OSD Language  
Screen Saver  
FL Dimmer  
DTV CC  
CC Style  
V-Chip  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Submenu will appear.  
EN 103  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 103  
2009/04/03 15:39:57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Display (cont’d)  
V-Chip  
MPAA Rating  
6
A
With the v-chip system in this unit, you can set the  
viewing limitation for the analog/digital TV programs  
received from the tuner or recorded on DVDs to prevent  
your children from watching inappropriate programs. If  
the unit detects a blocked program, a restriction message  
appears and you are not allowed to view the program.  
TV Rating  
B
C
D
Canadian English Rating  
Canadian French Rating  
You can set the viewing limitation according to  
MPAA rating (US movie ratings),  
TV Rating (US TV program ratings),  
Canadian English Rating (Canadian English language ratings).  
Canadian French Rating (Canadian French language ratings),  
1) Use [the Number buttons] to enter the access  
password.  
If you have not set the password, first, use [the  
Number buttons] to set the access password, then  
press [ENTER]. The number you entered will be stored  
as the access password.  
1) Use [K / L] to select the desired rating, then press  
[ENTER] repeatedly to switch between view and  
block. When it is blocked a key icon will appear.  
Password Input  
e.g.) MPAA rating  
MPAA Rating  
X
NC-17  
R
PG-13  
PG  
G
2) Use [K / L] to select a desired item, then press  
[ENTER].  
V-Chip  
A
MPAA Rating  
TV Rating  
Canadian English Rating  
Canadian French Rating  
Downloadable Rating  
Change Password  
B
C
D
E
NR  
[MPAA Rating]  
F
Rating  
Category  
Mature audience only  
Note  
X
higher  
• When you record a TV program blocked by the  
v-chip settings on the cassette tape, the audio/video  
signal of the blocked part cannot be recorded  
properly. No audio/video signal will be output when  
playing back that part.  
• When you press [DISPLAY] while playing back the  
blocked part on the cassette tape, the counter  
display will not be shown properly. This is not a  
malfunction.  
NC-17  
No one under 17 admitted  
Restricted; under 17 requires  
accompanying parent or adult guardian  
R
PG-13  
PG  
Unsuitable for children under 13  
Parental guidance suggested  
General audience  
G
NR  
No rating  
lower  
[TV Rating]  
Rating  
TV-MA  
TV-14  
TV-PG  
TV-G  
Category  
Mature audience only  
higher  
Unsuitable for children under 14  
Parental guidance suggested  
General audience  
TV-Y7  
TV-Y  
Appropriate for all children 7 and older  
Appropriate for all children  
No rating  
None  
lower  
[Canadian English Rating]  
Rating  
Category  
18+  
14+  
PG  
G
Adult audience only  
higher  
Unsuitable for ages under 14  
Parental guidance suggested  
General audience  
C8+  
C
For children over 8  
For all children  
E
Exempt program  
lower  
104 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 104  
2009/04/03 15:40:00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Display (cont’d)  
[Canadian French Rating]  
Rating  
Downloadable Rating  
E
Category  
Set the rating system via digital broadcasting, or clear the  
downloaded ratings.  
18ans+  
16ans+  
13ans+  
8ans+  
G
Adult audience only  
higher  
Unsuitable for ages under 16  
Unsuitable for ages under 13  
Unsuitable for ages under 8  
General audience  
This feature is available only after the digital TV  
ratings have been downloaded  
• The ratings can be downloaded by the unit  
automatically if it is available in your area.  
If the broadcasting signal does not have the  
downloadable rating information, the message below  
will appear.  
E
Exempt program  
lower  
As for TV Rating’s TV-MA, TV-14, TV-PG, or TV-Y7, you  
can further set the sub ratings to block specific  
elements of programming. Press [K / L/ { / B] to select  
the desired rating or sub rating, then press [ENTER]  
repeatedly to switch between view and block. Sub  
rating status will appear on the side of the main rating.  
Downloadable Rating is currently  
not available.  
• This message will also appear when you try to access  
“Downloadable Rating“ after you have cleared the  
downloadable rating information, and the new  
information has not been downloaded.  
TV Rating  
FV  
V
S
L
D
TV-MA  
TV-14  
TV-PG  
TV-G  
To set the rating:  
Use [K / L] to select “Block Setting” then press [ENTER]  
to show the various types of ratings. Use [K / L] to select  
a desired rating to set, then press [ENTER] to show the  
levels for the rating. Use [K / L] to select a level, then  
press [ENTER] to switch between view or block. If you set  
one level to block, a key icon will appear and all the  
higher levels will be blocked automatically.  
TV-Y7  
TV-Y  
None  
Sub Rating  
Category  
Rating  
TV-Y7  
FV  
V
Fantasy Violence  
Violence  
TV-PG  
TV-14  
TV-MA  
S
Sexual Situation  
Coarse Language  
Suggestive Dialogue  
Note  
L
• Depending on the type of rating system, you may set  
the levels individually.  
D
TV-PG, TV-14  
• The downloaded rating does not block the DVD  
contents.  
• The TV program blocked by the downloaded ratings  
cannot be recorded.  
Note  
• Changing the main rating to block or view  
automatically changes all its sub ratings to the same  
(block or view).  
To clear the downloadable rating information and its  
setting:  
Use [K / L] to select “Clear Downloadable Rating”, then  
press [ENTER].  
Change Password  
F
Change the current password.  
Use [the Number Buttons] to enter new access  
password.  
Note  
• Press [CLEAR] to erase numbers entered incorrectly.  
• When you forgot the access password, enter 4737  
using [the Number buttons] in password input  
window. Password will be cleared.  
EN 105  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 105  
2009/04/03 15:40:01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Video  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Progressive (Default : OFF)  
1
This unit is compatible with the progressive scan system.  
The feature provides you with the higher definition  
images than the traditional output system does. To utilize  
this feature, you must set progressive scan mode to “ON”.  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
1) Use [K / L] to select “ON“, then press [ENTER].  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Progressive  
ON  
OFF  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
2) Use [{ / B] to select “Yes“, then press [ENTER].  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
Activating progressive scan:  
Check your TV has progressive scan  
and connect with component video cable.  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
NOTE :  
If there is no picture or picture is  
distorted after selecting “Yes”,  
Wait about 15 seconds for auto recovery.  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Activate?  
Yes  
No  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
3) Use [K / L] to select “Yes“ within 15 seconds, then  
press [ENTER].  
Your setting will be activated.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
Note  
PAUSE  
VCR  
• If your TV is compatible with progressive scan (480p), you  
are recommended to use the HDMI or component video  
cable (commercially available) to connect this unit to the  
TV. (Refer to pages 21-22.) If not, use the RCA video cable  
and set the progressive scan to “OFF”.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
• If the Progressive Scan image is distorted, you can  
cancel Progressive Scan by pressing and holding  
[SETUP] for more than 3 seconds during DVD  
playback. The “Progressive” setting will be “OFF”.  
Press [STOP C] if you are playing back a disc.  
Press [SETUP] and use [K / L] to  
• When selecting “No” or not pressing any buttons on  
the unit or remote control within 15 seconds at step 3,  
progressive scan remains to be “OFF” (interlace scan).  
select “General Setting”, then press  
[ENTER].  
1
2
3
Use [K / L] to select “Video”, then  
press [ENTER].  
TV Aspect (Default: 16:9 Wide)  
2
You can select the TV aspect ratio to match the formats of  
what you are playing back with the unit and your TV  
screen (4:3 standard or 16:9 widescreen TV).  
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,  
then press [ENTER].  
Use [K / L] to select a desired option, then press [ENTER].  
TV Aspect  
1
2
3
Progressive  
TV Aspect  
Select Video  
4:3 Letter Box  
4:3 Pan & Scan  
16:9 Wide  
Submenu will appear.  
If you have a standard TV:  
Select “4:3 Letter Box”, so that black bars appear on the  
top and bottom of the TV screen when playing back a  
wide-screen picture. Select “4:3 Pan & Scan” for a full  
height picture with both sides trimmed when playing  
back wide-screen picture.  
Refer  
the selected item.  
to  
on this page and set  
1
2
4
5
• For  
, refer to “Connection to an External  
3
Device“ on page 55.  
If you have a widescreen TV:  
Select “16:9 Wide”.  
When you finish with the setting,  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
106 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 106  
2009/04/03 15:40:01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
DivX®  
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,  
then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
3
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
R
1
2
DivX VOD  
DivX Subtitle  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
DivX® VOD  
1
This unit allows you to play back the files purchased or  
rented from DivX® VOD (video-on-demand) services. The  
files are available on the internet. When you purchase or  
rent DivX® VOD files on the internet, you will be asked to  
enter an activation/registration code. This menu item  
provides you with the activation/registration code.  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
On how to activate this unit for the DivX® VOD file  
playback, visit www.divx.com/vod.  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
R
DivX VOD  
Your registration code is :  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
To learn more visit  
www.divx.com/vod  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Note  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
• One registration code is only valid for one DivX® VOD  
file.  
• You must first download the file from the internet  
and play it back on this unit before you are able to  
get another code.  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
• You must follow this step every time you purchase or  
rent a DivX® VOD file from the internet.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
• For more information for DivX®, please visit  
http://www.divx.com/vod.  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
• The registration code will be displayed in 8  
characters consist of numbers between 0 to 9 and  
capital letters chosen randomly.  
SE-R0294  
DivX Subtitle (Default : OFF)  
2
Set the DivX® subtitle.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use  
[K / L] to select “General Setting”,  
then press [ENTER].  
DivX Subtitle  
1
2
OFF  
English  
French  
Spanish  
German  
Italian  
Use [K / L] to select “DivX”, then  
press [ENTER].  
Swedish  
Your setting will be activated.  
Playback  
Display  
Video  
Recording  
Clock  
Channel  
DivX  
HDMI  
When you finish with the setting,  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
4
Reset All  
EN 107  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 107  
2009/04/03 15:40:03  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
HDMI  
Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use  
[K / L] to select “General Setting”,  
1
2
then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Use [K / L] to select “HDMI”, then  
press [ENTER].  
CH  
Playback  
Display  
Video  
Recording  
Clock  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Channel  
DivX  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
HDMI  
Reset All  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
• You cannot select HDMI when an HDMI cable is  
not connected or the TV’s external input  
channel is not set to HDMI.  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
Use [K / L] to select a desired item,  
then press [ENTER].  
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
3
4
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Format  
HDMI Audio  
RGB Range  
1
2
3
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
PAUSE  
VCR  
When you finish with the setting,  
press [SETUP] to exit.  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
Format (Default : RGB)  
1
SE-R0294  
You can select the color space for HDMI output.  
Set the appropriate color space for your display device.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
• When the connected device is not compatible with the  
Y/Cb/Cr, HDMI signal is output as RGB regardless of the  
setting.  
Format  
RGB  
YCbCr  
Your setting will be activated.  
108 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 108  
2009/04/03 15:40:05  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
HDMI (cont’d)  
HDMI Audio (Default : ON)  
2
If you do not want to output the audio through HDMI  
(when you digitally output the audio through the  
COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack to your audio system,  
etc.), you can set the HDMI audio output off.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
• Set to “OFF” when the HDMI sound is not output.  
HDMI Audio  
ON  
OFF  
Your setting will be activated.  
RGB Range (Default : Normal)  
3
You can adjust the RGB range to make the dark areas of  
the HDMI images brighter.  
Use [K / L] to select a setting, then press [ENTER].  
• Select “Enhanced“ if the black-white contrast is not clear.  
• This setting is effective only for HDMI RGB output.  
RGB Range  
Normal  
Enhanced  
Your setting will be activated.  
EN 109  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 109  
2009/04/03 15:40:07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL SETTING  
Reset All  
Reset the setting to default.  
Press [SETUP] in stop mode and use  
[K / L] to select “General Setting”,  
1
2
then press [ENTER].  
OPEN/  
INPUT  
CLOSE SELECT  
HDMI  
Use [K / L] to select “Reset All”, then  
press [ENTER].  
.@/:  
GHI  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
CH  
Playback  
Display  
Video  
Recording  
Clock  
PQRS  
TUV  
TIMER  
PROG.  
SPACE  
Channel  
DivX  
DTV/TV SETUP DISPLAY AUDIO  
HDMI  
Reset All  
DISC MENU  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
Select “Yes” using [K / L] , then press  
[ENTER].  
CLEAR  
RETURN  
3
INSTANT 1.3x/0.8x  
TIME SLIP  
FWD  
SKIP  
PLAY  
Reset to factory default?  
REV  
PLAY  
STOP  
Yes  
No  
SKIP  
SKIP  
DVD  
“Are you sure?” will appear. Select “Yes” using  
[K / L] and then press [ENTER].  
Your setting will be initialized.  
PAUSE  
VCR  
DUBBING  
REC MODE REC  
REPEAT TIMER SET SEARCH ZOOM  
SE-R0294  
Note  
• The settings listed below will remain unchanged  
even after resetting to the factory default.  
- Clock setting  
- Channel setting  
- OSD language setting  
- Parental lock setting  
- DivX® VOD code  
- V-chip setting  
- Timer programs  
110 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 110  
2009/04/03 15:40:07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR FUNCTIONS  
Information on VCR Functions  
Recording  
Caution on using S-video, component, or HDMI  
connection for VCR:  
• Only the playback audio / video are available with these  
connections.  
Press [VCR] first.  
Before recording, make sure:  
• The desired channel is selected by pressing  
• Under the conditions listed below, the playback image  
and audio cannot be output. Use the standard video  
connection, in such case;  
[the Number buttons] or [CH  
/
].  
• There is a cassette tape with an erase-protection tab in  
the unit.  
- during DVD recording.  
• The desired recording speed is selected in SP (standard  
playback) or SLP (super long playback) mode by  
pressing [REC MODE].  
- when L3 (DV-IN) is selected.  
• HDMI video resolution cannot be changed when the  
unit is in VCR mode.  
Recording speed:  
Tape speed  
Type of tape  
SP  
Recording / playback time  
Playback  
T60  
T120  
T160  
1hour  
2hours  
6hours  
2-2/3hours  
8hours  
1)Press [I/y ON/STANDBY] on the remote control or  
SLP  
3hours  
the front panel of the unit.  
• Refer to pages 50-54 for instructions on timer recording.  
When you are playing back a cassette tape, turn on the  
TV and be sure to select the input to which the unit is  
connected.  
1)Press [REC I] to begin the recording.  
To temporarily stop recording or to resume it, press  
[PAUSE F]. After the unit has been in pause mode for  
5 minutes, it will stop automatically to protect the  
cassette tape and the video head from damage.  
Press [VCR].  
2)Insert a prerecorded cassette tape. Press [PLAY B]  
to begin playback.  
3)During playback, press [PAUSE F].  
Playback will pause and sound will be muted.  
4)Press [PLAY B] to resume playback.  
5)Press [STOP C] to stop playback.  
6)Press [OPEN/CLOSE A] to eject the cassette tape.  
2)Press [STOP C] when the recording is completed.  
Note  
• When a cassette tape ends during playback, fast-  
forward or normal recording, the unit will  
automatically rewind to the beginning of the  
cassette tape. After rewinding finishes, the unit will  
eject the cassette tape.  
• When a cassette tape without erase-protection tab is  
inserted, the unit will start playback automatically.  
Accidental erasure prevention  
To prevent accidental recording on a  
recorded cassette tape, remove its erase-  
protection tab. To record on it later, cover  
erase-protection tab  
the hole with cellophane tape.  
Note  
• Tracking will be automatically adjusted upon  
playback. To adjust the tracking manually, press  
• This function is available only when the unit is  
connected by the VIDEO OUT jack.  
[CH  
/
].  
• Playback will stop when you change the output  
mode.  
EN 111  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 111  
2009/04/03 15:40:09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR FUNCTIONS  
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)  
Index Search  
This feature allows you to set the recording length simply  
by pressing [REC I] on the remote control.  
An index mark will be assigned at the beginning of each  
recording you make. You may skip to a specific marked  
point by following the steps below.  
Press [VCR] first.  
Press [VCR] first.  
1)During normal recording, press [REC I] to begin  
the one-touch timer recording.  
You can select a fixed recording time by pressing  
1)Press [SEARCH] so that “INDEX SEARCH” menu  
appears.  
[REC I] repeatedly.  
2)Using [the Number buttons], enter the number of  
recordings you wish to skip within 30 seconds.  
(0:30)  
(1:00)  
(Normal recording)  
(8:00)  
(7:30)  
INDEX SEARCH  
03  
When the one-touch timer recording is finished, the  
unit will turn off automatically.  
To change the recording length during the one-touch  
timer recording, press [REC I] repeatedly until the  
desired length appear.  
3)Press [REV E], [FWD D] to start index search.  
To cancel the one-touch timer recording within the  
specified time, press [STOP C].  
If you want to go in the forward direction, press  
[FWD D].  
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press  
[REV E].  
Note  
• The remaining recording time will be displayed on  
the front panel display during one-touch timer  
recording. Press [DISPLAY] to see it on the TV screen.  
After index search, the VCR will play back the cassette  
tape automatically.  
CURRENT PROGRAM  
• You cannot pause the one-touch timer recording.  
Beginning  
of tape  
End  
of tape  
• If VCR the one-touch timer recording is completed  
during DVD playback or recording, the VCR will be in  
stop mode and the DVD keeps the current mode.  
Pro.1 Pro.2 Pro.3 Pro.4 Pro.5  
02 01 01 02 03  
• Unlike a timer recording, you can perform the  
following operations during the one-touch timer  
recording.  
INDEX MARK  
- Turning off the power (One-touch timer recording  
will be canceled.).  
- Using [REC I] or [STOP C].  
• When the one-touch timer recording is finished and  
the power is turned off, the unit will switch to the  
standby mode automatically if a timer recording has  
been programmed. Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the  
standby mode for using the unit continuously.  
Note  
• You can make the index mark up to 20.  
• This function is available only when the unit is  
connected by the VIDEO OUT jack.  
• This function is available only when the unit is  
connected by the VIDEO OUT jack.  
112 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 112  
2009/04/03 15:40:11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VCR FUNCTIONS  
Time Search  
Other Operations  
This feature allows you to go to a specific point on a  
cassette tape by entering the exact amount of time you  
wish to skip in order to reach the point.  
Press [VCR] first.  
Fast forward:  
When the unit is in stop mode, press [FWD D] to fast  
forward the cassette tape.  
Rewind:  
When the unit is in stop mode, press [REV E] to rewind  
the cassette tape.  
Press [VCR] first.  
1)Press [SEARCH] repeatedly so that “TIME SEARCH”  
menu appears.  
To cue or review picture during playback (picture search):  
Press [REV E], [FWD D] during playback.  
Press it again and the unit will search in super high  
speed. (in the SLP mode only)  
2)Using [the Number buttons], enter your desired  
time to skip within 30 seconds.  
You can set the time up to 9:59.  
To freeze the picture on TV screen during playback  
(still mode):  
TIME SEARCH  
2:50  
Press [PAUSE F]. Each time you press the button, the  
picture will be forwarded by one frame.  
If the picture begins to vibrate vertically during the still  
mode, stabilize the picture by pressing [CH  
remote control.  
/
] on  
If the picture is distorted or rolling vertically, adjust the  
3)Press [REV E], [FWD D] to start time search.  
If you want to go in the forward direction, press  
[FWD D].  
If you want to go in the reverse direction, press  
[REV E].  
After time search, the unit will play back the cassette  
tape automatically.  
vertical hold control on your TV, if equipped.  
Counter reset:  
Press [CLEAR] to reset the counter to “0:00:00”.  
To playback in slow motion:  
Press [PAUSE F] during playback, then press [FWD D].  
Press [FWD D] or [REV E] repeatedly during slow  
motion playback to select the desired speed.  
Automatic rewind:  
Note  
When a cassette tape is played back or fast forwarded to  
its end, the cassette tape will rewind to the beginning,  
stop and eject itself.  
To repeat a playback indefinitely without touching  
[PLAY B] (Auto Repeat Playback):  
During normal playback, press [REPEAT]. When a tape is  
played to its end, the tape will rewind to the beginning and  
start playback itself. To cancel the Auto Repeat Playback,  
press [REPEAT] again.  
When you playback a cassette tape recorded in Hi-Fi  
stereo:  
• Index search and time search are not available  
during recording.  
• Press [STOP C] to stop the search.  
• If the end of the cassette tape is reached during  
search, this unit will cancel the search and rewind the  
cassette tape.  
• This function is available only when the unit is  
connected by the VIDEO OUT jack.  
Press [AUDIO ] on the remote control to select Hi-Fi or  
MONO for playback sound mode.  
• If you have connected a stereo TV to this unit, select “HIFI”.  
• If you have connected a monaural TV to this unit, select  
“MONO”.  
Your Selection  
HIFI  
MONO  
Monaural  
L+R  
L-channel  
R-channel  
Type of recorded tape  
non Hi-Fi tapes  
Monaural  
Monaural  
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded in  
Hi-Fi stereo  
L
R
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded main  
audio program  
Main audio  
program  
Main audio  
program  
Main audio  
program  
Hi-Fi tapes  
recorded second  
audio program  
Second audio Second audio Second audio  
program program program  
Note  
• Still/slow mode will stop after 5 minutes to prevent  
damage to the cassette tape and the video head.  
• To return to playback from the picture search/still/  
slow mode, press [PLAY B].  
EN 113  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 113  
2009/04/03 15:40:12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Before requesting service for this unit, check the table below for a possible cause of the problem you are experiencing.  
Some simple checks or a minor adjustment on your part may eliminate the problem and restore proper operation.  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.  
• Check the breaker (in case of power failure).  
• Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the timer standby mode.  
There is no picture.  
• Re-connect the connecting cords securely.  
• Check if the connecting cords are damaged.  
• Check the connection to your TV (pages 19-22).  
• Check if the progressive scan mode is set correctly according to your TV  
(page 106).  
• Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to “L1”) so that the signal  
from the unit appears on the TV screen.  
TV program reception does not fill the • Try to set the channels with “Auto Channel Preset” or “Manual Channel  
TV screen.  
Preset” in “Channel” menu (pages 27-29).  
• Select a channel of any TV program using [CH  
/
].  
TV channels cannot be changed.  
TV program pictures are distorted.  
• Switch the input to TV.  
• Connect the RF coaxial cable correctly (pages 19-24).  
• Check if all the connections are made correctly (pages 19-24).  
• Adjust TV antenna.  
• Adjust the picture. (Refer to the TV’s instruction manual.)  
• Place the unit and TV farther apart.  
• Place the TV and any bunched RF coaxial cables farther apart.  
Playback picture is distorted.  
• Keep the device which may cause electrical disturbances, such as a  
cellular phone, away.  
Playback picture or TV program from • If the playback picture output from a DVD player, VCR or tuner goes  
the device connected through the unit through the unit before reaching your TV, the copy-protection signal  
is distorted.  
applied to some programs could affect picture quality. Disconnect the  
playback device in question and connect it directly to your TV.  
D
V
D
•
No analog TV closed captions are  
output.  
• If you are using HDMI connection to watch the TV programs through  
this unit’s tuner, analog TV closed caption cannot be output. Try using  
other connection.  
There is no sound.  
• Re-connect all connections securely.  
• Check if the connecting cord is damaged.  
V
C
R
• Check the connections to the amplifier input.  
• Check if the input device setting on the amplifier is correct.  
• When the unit is in pause mode or in slow-motion playback mode,  
sound is not output. This is not a malfunction.  
• When the unit is in fast forward or fast reverse mode, sound is not  
output. This is not a malfunction.  
• If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(COAXIAL) jack, check the setting in “Audio Out” (page 101).  
• While the setup menu or timer programming display is shown, or while  
the screen saver is active, the audio is muted.  
No DTS sound on digital output.  
No DTS sound from analog output  
• Change the setting menu for “DTS” to “ON”.  
• This unit has no analog sound output when playing back the selected  
DTS sound mode.  
Nothing was recorded even though  
you set the timer setting correctly.  
• There was a power failure during recording.  
• The unit’s internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for  
more than 30 seconds. Reset the clock (page 32).  
• The program contains copy protection signals that restricts copying.  
• The timer setting overlapped with another setting that has priority.  
Timer recording does not start.  
• No disc is inserted.  
• A disc is not recordable (finalized DVD-RW/-R, finalized DVD+R, a fully  
recorded disc, etc.).  
Timer recording is not complete or did • The timer setting overlapped with another setting that has priority  
not start from the beginning.  
(page 54).  
• Disc space was not enough.  
• “Make Recording Compatible“ is not set to “ON”, when recording onto  
DVD+RW/+R that was recorded on other unit.  
Timer recording is impossible.  
• Make sure  
[TIMER SET].  
appears on the front panel display of this unit. If not, press  
114 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 114  
2009/04/03 15:40:14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The remote control does not function.  
• Batteries are weak.  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and the unit.  
• The remote control is far from the unit.  
• There are no batteries in the remote control.  
• Check if the unit is turned on.  
• The remote control is not pointed at the infrared sensor window on the unit.  
• Press [DVD] or [VCR], whichever you need. Then, try again.  
• Press [TIMER SET] to cancel the timer standby mode.  
The unit does not operate properly.  
DV signal cannot be input.  
• When static electricity, etc., causes the unit to operate abnormally,  
unplug the unit and then plug it in again.  
• Before connection, turn on the power supplies for both this unit and the  
DVC, and make sure that these units are in stop mode.  
• Only a “DVC-SD” signal can be input from the DVC to this unit. Other  
types of signals are not supported.  
• Do not connect any device other than the DVC. Even if a recorder or PC  
with another DV terminal is connected, the DV function will not operate.  
• If the DVC is not recognized after connection, turn off the power supply  
for the unit and re-connect the DVC.  
D
V
D
•
V
C
R
The DVC cannot be operated with this • Signal input or DVC operation from this unit may be disabled  
unit.  
depending on the type of DVC.  
• If a DVC signal cannot be input, use an external input  
(L1(Rear) / L2 (Front)) for analog connection via audio/video cables.  
• DVC control may be disabled depending on the type of DVC, even in a  
mode other than camera mode. In this case, switch to DVD control and  
execute the normal recording procedure while operating the DVC.  
Certain functions of the unit cannot  
operate.  
• Some functions may not operate depending on the type of DVC. For  
example, if the DVC does not support slow playback mode, the slow  
playback function is disabled.  
• With L3 (DV-IN), the disc display menu does not appear unless disc  
playback is executed.  
DV audio signal cannot be switched.  
• For recording with the DVC, the recording audio signal can be set to 12  
bits or 16 bits. However, when 16-bit recording mode is selected, audio  
signal cannot be switched. To record an audio signal, set it to 12 bits.  
There is no picture.  
• If the setup menu appears on the TV screen, press [RETURN] to exit.  
• Check if the progressive scan mode is set correctly according to your TV  
(page 106).  
Picture noise appears.  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.  
Playback picture from the external  
devices connected to this unit is  
distorted.  
• If the picture output signal from the external devices passes through this  
unit to get to your TV, the copy protection signal applied to some DVD could  
affect the picture quality. Disconnect the playback device in question and  
connect it directly to your TV.  
There is no sound.  
• If you are using DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack, check the setting in  
“Audio Out” (page 101).  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.  
Sound is noisy.  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.  
The disc does not play back.  
• No disc is inserted.  
D
V
D
• A blank disc is inserted.  
• The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.  
• The disc is not correctly inserted.  
• The unit cannot play back certain discs (such as a CD-ROM) (pages 9-10).  
• The region code on the DVD-video does not match the unit (page 10).  
• Moisture has condensed inside the unit. Remove the disc and leave the  
unit turned on for about 2 hours until the moisture evaporates (page 4).  
• If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the unit cannot play back  
the disc if it was not finalized.  
Playback image freezes for a second.  
• During the playback of 2 layered disc, picture may freeze for a moment  
when the 1st layer switches to the 2nd layer. This is not a malfunction.  
Discs recorded on this unit cannot be • If you are using DVD-RW/-R or DVD+R, please ensure you finalized the  
played back on other DVD players.  
disc after recording (pages 42-44).  
The disc does not start playback from  
the beginning.  
• Resume playback was activated (page 69). Press [STOP C] twice.  
• You have inserted a disc whose title menu or DVD menu automatically  
appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted.  
EN 115  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 115  
2009/04/03 15:40:15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The unit starts playing back the disc  
automatically.  
• The DVD-video features an auto playback function.  
Some functions such as stop, search,  
or slow-motion playback cannot be  
performed.  
• Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the  
operations. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the disc.  
The language for the sound track  
cannot be changed.  
• The title does not have the multilingual audio tracks.  
• The DVD-video prohibits the changing of the language for the sound  
track.  
The subtitle language cannot be  
changed or turned off.  
• Multilingual subtitle are not recorded on the DVD-video.  
The angles cannot be changed.  
• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD-video being played back.  
• The angle-change operation is whenever possible as long as the disc  
contains a multi-angle portion. Actual change will be performed when  
the portion has come up.  
• The DVD-video prohibits changing angles.  
• Try changing the angle using the DVD-video’s menu.  
Recording does not stop immediately  
after you press [STOP C].  
• It may take a few seconds for the unit to input disc data before  
recording stops.  
The disc tray does not open when you  
press [OPEN/CLOSE A].  
• It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have recorded  
or edited a disc. This is because the unit is adding disc data to the disc.  
“Repairing” appears on the TV screen. • If there is a power failure or unplugging during recording, finalizing,  
formatting or editing (even after “Repairing” disappears), a repairing  
D
V
D
process will begin automatically just after turning the unit on again.  
Repairing  
It may take several minutes up to about several hours.  
In a case you intend to cancel the  
repairing process.  
• If you intend to cancel the repairing process, press [A OPEN/CLOSE]  
on the front panel, then select “Yes” and press [ENTER]. After that, press  
[OPEN/CLOSE A] to take out the disc. The disc canceled during the  
repairing process MAY NOT work.  
Do you want to cancel a repairing  
process ? When selecting “Yes”,  
the disc may not be usable.  
Yes  
No  
Repairing  
No image from HDMI connection.  
• Check the HDMI connection. (Check the status of the HDMI related indications.)  
• Check whether the connected monitor device or other device supports  
HDCP. (This unit will not output a video signal unless the other device  
supports HDCP.)  
• Check the setting of HDMI.  
• Check whether the output format of this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches  
the supported input format of other connected device.  
• If the unit is connected to the unauthorized display device with an  
HDMI cable, the audio/video signal may not be output when playing  
back a commercial DVD-video.  
There is no sound or the sound is  
distorted.  
• The HDMI sound is not output when “HDMI Audio” is set to “OFF”.  
• Check the RCA audio cable connection. If you are using HDMI-DVI  
conversion cable, you must connect the RCA audio cable, too.  
• Check whether the output format of this unit (HDMI FORMAT) matches  
the supported input format of other connected device.  
Setup menu cannot be called up.  
There is no picture.  
• Setup menus cannot be called up during DVD recording and playback.  
• If you connect the cable to S-VIDEO OUT/ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT /  
HDMI OUT jack, connect it to AUDIO / VIDEO OUT jack instead.  
Picture noise appears.  
• Head cleaning for VCR may be necessary. Refer to “Auto head cleaning”  
(page 5).  
• Adjust tracking control for better picture by pressing [CH  
/
] while  
V
C
R
you are playing back a cassette tape.  
The cassette tape does not play back. • No cassette tape is inserted.  
The tape ejected after you press  
• Make sure the cassette tape has an erase-protection tab when you record  
to a cassette tape. If needed, cover the hole with cellophane tape.  
[REC I].  
The remote control does not function. • Check if a cassette tape is in this unit.  
The motor rotates even when  
playback / recording is stopped.  
• The motor may rotate for the duration of approximately 5 minutes for  
efficient operation. This is not a malfunction.  
116 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 116  
2009/04/03 15:40:15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Error message  
Cause  
Solution  
Disc Error  
• Unplayable disc is inserted in the unit.  
• The disc is upside down.  
• Insert the standardized disc which have  
the marks on pages 9-10.  
— Please eject the disc. —  
Playback feature may not be available on this disc.  
•
Insert the disc with the labeled side facing up.  
Region Error  
— Please eject the disc. —  
Playback is not authorized in your region.  
• Playback is not authorized in the region  
of the DVD-video which you inserted in  
the unit.  
• Insert the DVD-video with region codes  
1 or ALL.  
Parental Lock On  
The current selected parental level  
prohibits playback.  
• The current selected parental level  
prohibits playback.  
• Check “Parental Lock” setting in  
“Playback” menu (page 100).  
Recording Error  
This program is not allowed to be recorded.  
• You are trying to record the copy  
prohibited program.  
• You cannot record copy prohibited  
programs.  
Recording Error  
This program is not recordable in Video  
mode.  
• You are trying to record the copy-once  
program onto the DVD-RW disc in  
Video mode.  
• Set “Format Mode” to “VR mode”  
(pages 39-40).  
Recording Error  
This program is not recordable in +VR mode.  
• You are trying to record the copy-once  
program.  
• Insert the DVD-RW disc in VR mode  
(ver.1.1 or 1.2 compatible with CPRM).  
Recording Error  
Cannot record on this disc.  
• You are trying to record onto the disc  
which is unrecordable, or the disc status  
is unable to record.  
• Insert the recordable disc, and ensure  
the disc status satisfies the recording  
requirements (page 9).  
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth.  
• Replace the disc.  
• The disc is dirty.  
• The disc is damaged.  
Recording Error  
This program is not allowed to be  
recorded on this disc.  
• You are trying to record the copy-once  
program onto the DVD-RW disc which  
is not compatible with CPRM.  
• Insert the DVD-RW disc in VR mode  
(ver.1.1 or 1.2 compatible with CPRM).  
Recording Error  
This disc is protected and not recordable.  
•
You are trying to record onto the protected  
disc which is set in “DVD Menu” menu.  
• Release the disc protect setting in “DVD  
Menu” menu (page 41).  
Recording Error  
• You are trying to record onto the disc  
which has no space for recording.  
• Insert the recordable disc with enough  
recording space.  
Disc is full.  
(No area for new recording)  
Recording Error  
•
•
•
•
•
You are trying to record onto the DVD-  
RW/-R on which the number of recording  
titles comes up to the maximum (99).  
• Delete unnecessary titles (pages 82-83).  
You cannot record more than 99 titles on one disc.  
(The maximum is 99)  
Recording Error  
You cannot record more than 999 chapters on one disc.  
(The maximum is 999)  
You are trying to record onto the VR mode  
DVD-RW on which the number of recording  
chapters comes up to the maximum (999).  
• Delete unnecessary chapter marks  
(page 88).  
Recording Error  
You cannot record more than 49 titles on one disc.  
(The maximum is 49)  
You are trying to record onto the DVD+RW/  
+R on which the number of recording titles  
comes up to the maximum (49).  
• Delete unnecessary titles (pages 82-83).  
Recording Error  
You cannot record more than 254 chapters on one disc.  
(The maximum is 254)  
You are trying to record onto the DVD+RW  
on which the number of recording  
chapters comes up to the maximum (254).  
• Delete unnecessary chapter marks  
(page 88).  
Recording Error  
You cannot record on this disc as Control  
Information is full.  
This disc has no space to write the Control  
• Delete unnecessary titles  
(pages 82-83).  
Information when recording or deleting contents.  
When editing has been repeatedly performed,  
the control Information area may come up to be  
full even the recording area has enough space.  
Recording Error  
You cannot record on this disc as Power  
Calibration Area is full.  
•
•
When recordings are performed  
• Insert a new disc.  
repeatedly onto an unstable disc, this  
area may come up to be full.  
Every time you insert a disc for recording,  
the disc’s working area will be taken up.  
And if you repeat this frequently, it will  
be used up sooner and you may not be  
able to record full 49 titles.  
Recording Error  
This disc is already finalized.  
• You are trying to record onto the disc  
already finalized.  
• Undo the finalizing for this disc (pages  
43-44).  
Recording Error  
• You are trying to record onto the  
unfinalized +VR mode discs recorded  
on other unit.  
• Set “Make Recording Compatible” to  
“ON” to rewrite the menu, after that you  
will record to disc (page 46).  
The disc has no recording compatibility.  
Set “Make Recording Compatible” to  
“ON” to convert the disc.  
* If you are still having trouble with the unit after checking “TROUBLESHOOTING”, write down the error code and the  
error description for calling our help line to locate an Authorized Service Center.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
– Can I record to CD-RW/-R?  
No, this unit records only DVD.  
– Can I play back DVD-video that is bought in another country? Possible when the region code of the disc is 1 and All.  
– Can I connect the unit to my PC?  
– Can I program a timer recording with cable/satellite box?  
No, you cannot control the unit by PC.  
Yes, you can. Select “L1 (Rear)” or “L2 (Front)” as your  
recording channel, and leave the cable/satellite box on  
(pages 23, 50-55).  
EN 117  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 117  
2009/04/03 15:40:16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LANGUAGE CODE  
Language  
Abkhazian  
Afar  
Afrikaans  
Albanian  
Amharic  
Arabic  
Armenian  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Code  
4748  
4747  
4752  
6563  
4759  
4764  
5471  
4765  
4771  
4772  
4847  
5167  
4860  
5072  
4854  
4855  
4864  
4853  
5971  
4851  
5759  
4947  
7254  
4961  
5464  
4965  
5047  
6058  
5160  
5161  
5166  
5261  
5256  
5255  
5264  
5271  
5358  
5747  
5051  
5158  
5758  
5360  
5367  
5447  
5569  
5455  
Language  
Hungarian  
Icelandic  
Indonesian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiak  
Code  
5467  
5565  
5560  
5547  
5551  
5557  
5347  
5566  
5647  
5669  
5760  
5765  
5757  
6469  
5771  
6460  
5761  
5767  
5861  
5847  
5868  
5860  
5866  
5957  
5953  
5965  
5958  
5966  
5955  
5964  
5961  
5960  
6047  
6051  
6061  
6149  
6164  
6159  
6247  
6265  
5247  
6258  
6266  
6367  
6459  
6461  
Language  
Russian  
Samoan  
Sangho  
Sanskrit  
Scots Gaelic  
Serbian  
Serbo-Croatian  
Sesotho  
Setswana  
Shona  
Code  
6467  
6559  
6553  
6547  
5350  
6564  
6554  
6566  
6660  
6560  
6550  
6555  
6565  
6557  
6558  
6561  
5165  
6567  
6569  
6568  
6658  
6653  
6647  
6666  
6651  
6654  
4861  
6655  
6661  
6665  
6664  
6657  
6669  
6757  
6764  
6772  
6855  
6861  
4971  
6961  
7054  
5655  
7161  
7267  
Irish  
Italian  
Japanese  
Javanese  
Kannada  
Kashmiri  
Kazakh  
Kinyarwanda  
Kirghiz  
Kirundi  
Korean  
Kurdish  
Laothian  
Latin  
Latvian; Lettish  
Lingala  
Lithuanian  
Macedonian  
Malagasy  
Malay  
Malayalam  
Maltese  
Maori  
Marathi  
Moldavian  
Mongolian  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Oriya  
Oromo (Afan)  
Panjabi  
Pashto; Pushto  
Persian  
Polish  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Romanian  
Sindhi  
Singhalese  
Siswat  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Somali  
Spanish  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Swedish  
Tagalog  
Tajik  
Basque  
Bengali;Bangla  
Bhutani  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Breton  
Bulgarian  
Burmese  
Byelorussian  
Cambodian  
Catalan  
Chinese  
Corsican  
Croatian  
Czech  
Danish  
Dutch  
English  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Faroese  
Fiji  
Finnish  
French  
Tamil  
Tatar  
Telugu  
Thai  
Tibetan  
Tigrinya  
Tonga  
Tsonga  
Turkish  
Turkmen  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Frisian  
Uzbek  
Galician  
Georgian  
German  
Greek  
Greenlandic  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Welsh  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yiddish  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Hebrew  
Hindi  
118 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 118  
2009/04/03 15:40:17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GLOSSARY  
Analog Audio  
PCM (pulse code modulation)  
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.  
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical  
The most common system of encoding digital audio,  
found on CD and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a  
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital  
“Digital Audio”.  
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio  
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amplifiers with  
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and  
MPEG audio to PCM. See also “Digital Audio”.  
Aspect Ratio  
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.  
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the TV screen  
is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the TV  
screen is almost twice as wide as it is high).  
Progressive Scan (480p)  
A type of display that does not split each frame into  
fields, and instead scans directly through all the scanlines  
of each frame in order. Progressive scan provides less  
flickering and higher image resolution than traditional  
(480i) TV signals. Refer to page 106 for instructions on  
selective progressive scan mode.  
Chapter  
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a  
DVD is usually divided into chapters. See also “Title”.  
Component Video Output  
Each signal of luminance (Y) and component (PB/CB, PR/  
CR) is independent to output so that you can experience  
picture color as it is.  
Also, due to compatibility with progressive video (480p),  
you can experience higher-density picture than that in  
interlace (480i).  
Region Code  
Regions associate discs and players with particular areas  
of the world. This unit will only play back discs that have  
compatible region codes. You can find the region code  
of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are  
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).  
Digital Audio  
Sampling Frequency  
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During  
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals  
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-  
to-digital converter, generating a stream of numbers.  
On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates  
an analog signal based on these numbers. See also  
“Sampling Frequency” and “Analog Audio”.  
The rate which sound is measured by a specified interval  
to turn into digital audio data. The numbers of sampling  
in one second defines as sampling frequency. The higher  
the rate, the better the sound quality.  
SAP (secondary audio program)  
Sub-audio channel which is delivered separately from  
main-audio channel. This audio channel is used as an  
alternate in bilingual broadcasting.  
DivX®  
DivX® is a codec (compression/decompression) that can  
compress images to a very small amount of data.  
S-Video Output  
It delivers independently each signal of color(C) and  
luminance(Y) to TV as video signals, so that higher-quality  
picture will be gained.  
Dolby® Digital  
The system to compress digital sound developed by  
Dolby Laboratories. It offers you sound of stereo(2ch) or  
multi channel audio.  
Title (DVD only)  
A collection of chapters on DVD. See also “Chapter”.  
DTS® (Digital Theater System)  
Track  
DTS is a multi channel surround sound system. By  
connecting to DTS decoder you can enjoy dynamic and  
realistic sound like movie theatre. DTS surround sound  
technologies were developed by DTS, Inc.  
Audio CD use tracks to divide up the content of a disc.  
The DVD equivalent is called a chapter. See also “Chapter”.  
Video mode  
Finalize  
Video mode is the same recording format as used on  
the DVD videos you purchase in local shops. You can  
play back the discs recorded in this format in most DVD  
players, however it offers only limited editing. You will  
need to finalize discs recorded in video mode before  
playing them back on other unit.  
To make DVD, which have been recorded on, possible to  
play back in DVD players.  
HDMI™ (high definition multimedia interface)  
A digital interface between audio and video source. It can  
transmit component video, audio, and control signal with  
one cable connection.  
VR mode  
A basic recording format for DVD-RW. VR mode offers  
advanced editing, however it is playable only on VR  
mode compatible unit. Finalization is recommended  
before playing them back on other unit.  
JPEG (joint photographic experts group)  
JPEG is a method of compressing still image files. You can  
copy JPEG files on CD-RW/-R from a computer and play  
back the files on this unit.  
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio)  
MP3 (MPEG audio layer 3)  
WMA is the audio compressing technology developed by  
Microsoft. You can copy WMA files on CD-RW/-R from a  
computer and play them back on this unit.  
MP3 is a method of compressing files. You can copy MP3  
files on CD-RW/-R from the computer and play back the  
files on this unit.  
+VR mode  
A recording format for DVD+RW/+R. +VR mode offers basic  
editing, and it is playable on most DVD players. Finalization  
is recommended before playing them back on other unit.  
EN 119  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 119  
2009/04/03 15:40:17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
• This model complies with the below specifications.  
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.  
General  
VCR video heads  
Four heads  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
Weight  
AC120 V, 60 Hz  
30 W (standby: 3.3 W)  
9.5 lbs ( 4.3 kg )  
Dimensions (width x height x depth)  
Operating temperature  
Operating humidity  
TV system  
17.2” x 4.0” x 10.6” (435 x 99.5 x 268 mm)  
41 °F to 104 °F (5 °C to 40 °C)  
Less than 80% (no condensation)  
ATSC / NTSC-M TV standard  
Recording  
Recording format  
VR (video recording) format  
Video format  
+VR format  
Recording discs  
DVD-Rewritable/-Recordable, DVD+Rewritable/+Recordable  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency  
Compression format  
13.5 MHz  
MPEG  
48 kHz  
Dolby Digital/LPCM (XP Recording mode only)  
Input / Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal  
Video input  
VHF/UHF set 75Ω  
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)  
1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Input level  
Jacks  
RCA jack  
Video output  
Output level  
Jack  
Output 1 (rear)  
1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
RCA jack  
S-video input  
Y (luminance) - Input level  
C (color) - Input level  
Jacks  
S-video output  
Y (luminance) - Output level  
C (color) - Output level  
Jack  
Input 1 (rear)  
1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
286 mVp-p (75Ω)  
4 pin mini DIN  
Output 1 (rear)  
1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
286 mVp-p (75Ω)  
4 pin mini DIN  
Output 1 (rear)  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75Ω), PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)  
RCA jacks  
Component video output  
Output level  
Jacks  
HDMI output  
Jack  
HDMI jack  
Audio input  
During audio input  
Jacks  
Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R  
2 V rms (input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)  
RCA jacks  
Audio output  
During audio output  
Jacks  
Output 2 L/R (rear)  
2 V rms (output impedance: less than 1 kΩ)  
RCA jacks  
Digital audio output  
Output level  
Jack  
Output 1 (rear) COAXIAL  
500 mVp-p (75Ω)  
RCA jack  
DV input  
Jack  
IEEE 1394  
DV input jack (4 pin)  
120 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 120  
2009/04/03 15:40:18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
Limited United States Warranty  
Digital Audio Video (“DAV”) Product - Exchange Warranty  
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in the United States.  
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DAV PRODUCT  
AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.  
DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA  
AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
DAV PRODUCTS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED  
IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
Limited Warranty  
How to Obtain Warranty Services  
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking  
the section “TROUBLESHOOTING,” you find that service is needed:  
TACP warrants this DAV Product and its parts against defects in materials  
or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original  
retail purchase.  
DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV  
PRODUCT WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT WITHOUT  
CHARGE TO YOU. DURING THE PERIOD THAT COMMENCES ON THE  
DATE THAT IS NINETY ONE (91) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL  
RETAIL PURCHASE AND ENDS ON THE DATE THAT IS THREE HUNDRED  
SIXTY FIVE (365) DAYS AFTER THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL  
PURCHASE, TACP WILL EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE DAV PRODUCT  
WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED DAV PRODUCT FOR A FEE.  
(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty service for your DAV Product  
under the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program, contact  
TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.  
(2) You must include the original bill of sale (or a copy of the original bill  
of sale) or other proof of purchase along with the entire DAV Product  
when sending the DAV Product to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center  
specified by TACP’s Consumer Solutions Center. You are responsible  
for all inbound transportation and insurance charges for the DAV Product  
to the TACP Warranty Exchange Center.  
Rental Units  
The warranty for DAV Product rental units begins on the date of the first  
rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,  
whichever comes first.  
For additional information, visit TACP’s website: www.tacp.toshiba.com  
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.  
S.A., INCLUDINGTHE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE EXPRESSLY  
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET  
FORTH ABOVE.WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY WARRANTIES  
IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY  
LIMITED,THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU  
OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND  
SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE REPAIR  
OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE  
LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,  
OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY  
USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DAV PRODUCT).  
Commercial Units  
DAV Products sold and used for commercial purposes have a limited  
warranty for all parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date of  
original retail purchase and ends on the date that is ninety (90) days  
thereafter.  
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration Card  
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DAV Product.  
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your  
DAV Product on-line at  
By registering your DAV Product you will enable TACP to bring you new  
products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact  
you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the U.S.  
Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the product  
registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.  
www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as possible.  
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,  
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.  
The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any  
obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law  
of the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90)  
days from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect.  
This limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under state law.  
Your Responsibility  
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING  
CONDITIONS:  
THIS WARRANTY GIVESYOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU  
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO  
STATE INTHE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW  
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS,WHEN  
AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION  
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SOTHE ABOVE  
PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TOYOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.  
(1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide other proof of purchase.  
(2) All warranty servicing of this DAV Product must be made pursuant  
to the TACP DAV Product Warranty Exchange Program.  
(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if the DAV Product is  
purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.  
(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer  
controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered  
by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna  
systems are your responsibility.  
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as  
limited above, and do not extend to any DAV Product or parts that  
have been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DAV Product  
or parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as  
lightning or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation,  
improper maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by  
TACP; use or malfunction through simultaneous use of this DAV Product  
and connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had  
the serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.  
(6) This warranty does not cover Product sold AS IS or WITH ALL FAULTS.  
EN 121  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 121  
2009/04/03 15:40:18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
/LPLWHGꢀ&DQDGLDQꢀ:DUUDQW\  
)RUꢀ7RVKLEDꢀ%UDQGꢀ'LJLWDOꢀ$XGLRꢁ9LGHRꢀ3URGXFWV  
7RVKLEDꢀRIꢀ&DQDGDꢀ/LPLWHGꢀꢁꢂ7&/ꢂꢃꢀPDNHVꢀWKHꢀIROORZLQJꢀOLPLWHGꢀZDUUDQWLHVꢀWRꢀRULJLQDOꢀFRQVXPHUVꢀLQꢀ&DQDGDꢄꢀ7+(6(ꢀ/,0,7('ꢀ  
:$55$17,(6ꢀ(;7(1'ꢀ72ꢀ7+(ꢀ25,*,1$/ꢀ&21680(5ꢀ385&+$6(5ꢀ25ꢀ$1<ꢀ3(5621ꢀ5(&(,9,1*ꢀ7+,6ꢀ726+,%$ꢀ%5$1'ꢀ  
',*,7$/ꢀ$8',2ꢁ9,'(2ꢀ352'8&7ꢀꢂWKHꢀꢃ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢂ6ꢄꢃꢀRUꢀꢃ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢂVꢄꢃꢄꢀ$6ꢀ$ꢀ*,)7ꢀ)520ꢀ7+(ꢀ25,*,1$/ꢀ&21680(5ꢀ  
385&+$6(5ꢀ$1'ꢀ72ꢀ12ꢀ27+(5ꢀ385&+$6(5ꢀ25ꢀ75$16)(5((ꢅ  
'$9ꢀ352'8&76ꢀ385&+$6('ꢀ,1ꢀ&$1$'$ꢆꢀ$1'ꢀ86('ꢀ$1<:+(5(ꢀ2876,'(ꢀ2)ꢀ&$1$'$ꢀ,1&/8',1*ꢆꢀ:,7+287ꢀ/,0,7$7,21ꢆꢀ  
7+(ꢀ81,7('ꢀ67$7(6ꢀ$1'ꢀ0(;,&2ꢆꢀ$5(ꢀ127ꢀ&29(5('ꢀ%<ꢀ7+(6(ꢀ:$55$17,(6ꢅꢀꢀ  
'$9ꢀ352'8&76ꢀ385&+$6('ꢀ$1<:+(5(ꢀ2876,'(ꢀ2)ꢀ&$1$'$ꢆꢀ,1&/8',1*ꢆꢀ:,7+287ꢀ/,0,7$7,21ꢆꢀ7+(ꢀ81,7('ꢀ67$7(6ꢀ  
$1'ꢀ0(;,&2ꢆꢀ$1'ꢀ86('ꢀ,1ꢀ&$1$'$ꢆꢀ$5(ꢀ127ꢀ&29(5('ꢀ%<ꢀ7+(6(ꢀ:$55$17,(6ꢅ  
Fꢄ 5HSDLUꢀRIꢀGDPDJHꢀWKDWꢀLVꢀFRVPHWLFꢀRQO\ꢀRUꢀGRHVꢀQRWꢀDIIHFWꢀ  
WKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀIXQFWLRQDOLW\ꢅꢀVXFKꢀDVꢀZHDUꢀDQGꢀWHDUꢅꢀ  
VFUDWFKHVꢀDQGꢀGHQWVꢏ  
Gꢄ 6HUYLFHꢀRQꢀ7RVKLEDꢐEUDQGHGꢀDFFHVVRU\ꢀLWHPVꢀꢁVXFKꢀ  
DFFHVVRU\ꢀLWHPVꢀPD\ꢀEHꢀFRYHUHGꢀE\ꢀWKHLUꢀRZQꢀZDUUDQW\ꢃꢏ  
Hꢄ 6HUYLFHꢀRQꢀWKLUGꢀSDUW\ꢀSURGXFWVꢀRUꢀVHUYLFHꢀPDGHꢀQHFHVVDU\ꢀ  
E\ꢀXVHꢀRIꢀLQFRPSDWLEOHꢀWKLUGꢀSDUW\ꢀSURGXFWVꢏꢀ  
/LPLWHGꢀ2QHꢀꢂꢇꢄꢀ<HDUꢀ:DUUDQW\ꢀRQꢀ3DUWVꢀDQGꢀ/DERXU  
6XEMHFWꢀWRꢀWKHꢀPRUHꢀOLPLWHGꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀLIꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀLVꢀXVHGꢀIRUꢀ  
DQ\ꢀFRPPHUFLDOꢀRUꢀEXVLQHVVꢀSXUSRVHVꢀDVꢀVHWꢀRXWꢀEHORZꢅꢀ7&/ꢀ  
ZDUUDQWVꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀDQGꢀLWVꢀSDUWVꢀDJDLQVWꢀPDWHULDOꢀGHIHFWVꢀLQꢀ  
PDWHULDOVꢀRUꢀZRUNPDQVKLSꢀWKDWꢀUHVXOWꢀLQꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀIDLOLQJꢀIRUꢀ  
DꢀSHULRGꢀRIꢀRQHꢀꢁꢆꢃꢀ\HDUꢀDIWHUꢀWKHꢀGDWHꢀRIꢀRULJLQDOꢀUHWDLOꢀSXUFKDVHꢄꢀ  
'85,1*ꢀ7+,6ꢀ3(5,2'ꢆꢀ7&/ꢀ:,//ꢆꢀ$7ꢀ7&/·6ꢀ237,21ꢆꢀ5(3$,5ꢀ  
25ꢀ5(3/$&(ꢀ$ꢀ'()(&7,9(ꢀ3$57ꢀ:,7+ꢀ$ꢀ1(:ꢀ25ꢀ  
5()85%,6+('ꢀ3$57ꢆꢀ:,7+287ꢀ&+$5*(ꢀ72ꢀ<28ꢀ)25ꢀ  
3$576ꢀ25ꢀ/$%285ꢅꢀ<28ꢀ0867ꢀ'(/,9(5ꢀ7+(ꢀ(17,5(ꢀ'$9ꢀ  
352'8&7ꢀ72ꢀ$ꢀ7&/ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ$87+25,=('ꢀ6(59,&(ꢀ  
3529,'(5ꢀꢂꢃ$63ꢃꢄꢅꢀ<28ꢀ0867ꢀ3$<ꢀ)25ꢀ$//ꢀ  
75$163257$7,21ꢀ$1'ꢀ,1685$1&(ꢀ&+$5*(6ꢀ)25ꢀ7+(ꢀ  
'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ72ꢀ$1'ꢀ)520ꢀ7+(ꢀ$63ꢅꢀ  
5HQWDOꢀ8QLWV  
7KHꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀIRUꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀUHQWDOꢀXQLWVꢀEHJLQVꢀZLWKꢀWKHꢀGDWHꢀRIꢀ  
ILUVWꢀUHQWDOꢀRUꢀWKLUW\ꢀꢁꢇꢈꢃꢀGD\VꢀIURPꢀWKHꢀGDWHꢀRIꢀVKLSPHQWꢀWRꢀWKHꢀUHQWDOꢀ  
ILUPꢅꢀZKLFKHYHUꢀFRPHVꢀILUVWꢄ  
Iꢄ 6HUYLFHꢀPDGHꢀQHFHVVDU\ꢀE\ꢀWKHꢀVLPXOWDQHRXVꢀXVHꢀRIꢀWKLVꢀ  
'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀDQGꢀFRQQHFWHGꢀHTXLSPHQWꢏꢀ  
Jꢄ  
0RGLILFDWLRQVꢀWRꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀQRWꢀDSSURYHGꢀLQꢀZULWLQJꢀ  
E\ꢀ7&/ꢅꢀDQGꢀVHUYLFHꢀPDGHꢀQHFHVVDU\ꢀE\ꢀWKHꢀXVHꢀRUꢀ  
LQVWDOODWLRQꢀRIꢀQRQꢐ7RVKLEDꢀPRGLILFDWLRQVꢀWRꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ  
3URGXFWꢏꢀ  
Kꢄ 6HUYLFHꢀRIꢀDꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀRQꢀZKLFKꢀWKHꢀ726+,%$ꢀODEHOꢀRUꢀ  
ORJRꢅꢀUDWLQJꢀODEHOꢀRUꢀVHULDOꢀQXPEHUꢀKDYHꢀEHHQꢀGHIDFHGꢀRUꢀ  
UHPRYHGꢏ  
Lꢄ 2QꢐVLWHꢀVHUYLFHꢀDQGꢀUHSDLUꢀRIꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢏ  
Mꢄ 'DPDJHꢀWRꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀFDXVHGꢀE\ꢀIDLOXUHꢀWRꢀIROORZꢀ  
WKHꢀVSHFLILFDWLRQVꢅꢀ8VHUꢀPDQXDOVꢀRUꢀJXLGHVꢀDVꢀWRꢀXVDJHꢀ  
DQGꢌRUꢀVWRUDJHꢄ  
/LPLWHGꢀ:DUUDQW\ꢀIRUꢀ&RPPHUFLDOꢀ8QLWV  
7&/ꢀZDUUDQWVꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWVꢀWKDWꢀDUHꢀXVHGꢀIRUꢀDQ\ꢀFRPPHUFLDOꢀRUꢀ  
EXVLQHVVꢀSXUSRVHVꢀDVꢀIROORZVꢉꢀꢀDOOꢀSDUWVꢀDUHꢀZDUUDQWHGꢀDJDLQVWꢀ  
PDWHULDOꢀGHIHFWVꢀLQꢀPDWHULDOVꢀRUꢀZRUNPDQVKLSꢀWKDWꢀUHVXOWꢀLQꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ  
3URGXFWꢀIDLOLQJꢀIRUꢀDꢀSHULRGꢀRIꢀQLQHW\ꢀꢁꢊꢈꢃꢀGD\VꢀDIWHUꢀWKHꢀGDWHꢀRIꢀ  
RULJLQDOꢀUHWDLOꢀSXUFKDVHꢄꢀ'85,1*ꢀ7+,6ꢀ3(5,2'ꢆꢀ7&/ꢀ:,//ꢆꢀ  
$7ꢀ7&/·6ꢀ237,21ꢆꢀ5(3$,5ꢀ25ꢀ5(3/$&(ꢀ$ꢀ'()(&7,9(ꢀ3$57ꢀ  
:,7+ꢀ$ꢀ1(:ꢀ25ꢀ5()85%,6+('ꢀ3$57ꢆꢀ:,7+287ꢀ&+$5*(ꢀ  
72ꢀ<28ꢀ)25ꢀ3$576ꢀ25ꢀ/$%285ꢅꢀꢀ<28ꢀ0867ꢀ'(/,9(5ꢀ7+(ꢀ  
(17,5(ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ72ꢀ$1ꢀ$63ꢅꢀ<28ꢀ0867ꢀ3$<ꢀ)25ꢀ$//ꢀ  
75$163257$7,21ꢀ$1'ꢀ,1685$1&(ꢀ&+$5*(6ꢀ)25ꢀ7+(ꢀ  
'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ72ꢀ$1'ꢀ)520ꢀ7+(ꢀ$63ꢅ  
'LVFODLPHUꢀDQGꢀ/LPLWDWLRQꢀRIꢀ5HPHG\  
72ꢀ7+(ꢀ(;7(17ꢀ127ꢀ35(&/8'('ꢀ%<ꢀ/$:ꢆꢀ$//ꢀ27+(5ꢀ  
(;35(66ꢀ$1'ꢀ,03/,('ꢀ:$55$17,(6ꢆꢀ&21',7,216ꢀ$1'ꢀ  
5(35(6(17$7,216ꢀ)25ꢀ7+,6ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢆꢀ,1&/8',1*ꢀ  
7+(ꢀ,03/,('ꢀ:$55$17,(6ꢀ$1'ꢀ&21',7,216ꢀ2)ꢀ  
0(5&+$17$%,/,7<ꢀ$1'ꢀ),71(66ꢀ)25ꢀ$ꢀ3$57,&8/$5ꢀ  
385326(ꢆꢀ$5(ꢀ+(5(%<ꢀ',6&/$,0('ꢀ$1'ꢀ(;&/8'('ꢅꢀꢀ  
,)ꢀ7+(ꢀ$33/,&$%/(ꢀ/$:ꢆꢀ67$78725<ꢀ25ꢀ27+(5:,6(ꢆꢀ  
35(&/8'(6ꢀ7+(ꢀ(;&/86,21ꢀ2)ꢀ$1<ꢀ,03/,('ꢀ  
:$55$17,(6ꢆꢀ&21',7,216ꢀ$1'ꢀ5(35(6(17$7,216ꢀ  
7+(1ꢀ68&+ꢀ,03/,('ꢀ:$55$17,(6ꢆꢀ&21',7,216ꢀ$1'ꢀ  
5(35(6(17$7,216ꢀ$5(ꢀ27+(5:,6(ꢀ/,0,7('ꢀ,1ꢀ  
'85$7,21ꢀ72ꢀ7+(ꢀ7(50ꢀ2)ꢀ7+,6ꢀ(;35(66ꢀ:5,77(1ꢀ  
/,0,7('ꢀ:$55$17<ꢅꢀꢀ72ꢀ7+(ꢀ(;7(17ꢀ127ꢀ35(&/8'('ꢀ  
%<ꢀ/$:ꢆꢀ67$78725<ꢀ25ꢀ27+(5:,6(ꢆꢀ7+,6ꢀ:5,77(1ꢀ  
:$55$17<ꢀ683(5&('(6ꢀ$1'ꢀ63(&,),&$//<ꢀ',6&/$,06ꢀ  
$1<ꢀ27+(5ꢀ:$55$17<ꢆꢀ&21',7,21ꢀ25ꢀ5(35(6(17$7,21ꢀ  
127ꢀ67$7('ꢀ,1ꢀ7+,6ꢀ:$55$17<ꢆꢀ:+(7+(5ꢀ0$'(ꢀ%<ꢀꢀ  
7&/ꢆꢀ726+,%$ꢀ&25325$7,21ꢆꢀꢀ7+(,5ꢀ$)),/,$7(6ꢆꢀ$'5Vꢀ  
$1'ꢀ$63Vꢀ$1'ꢀ:+(7+(5ꢀ0$'(ꢀ25$//<ꢀ25ꢀ,1ꢀ:5,7,1*ꢀ  
ꢂ,1&/8',1*ꢀ$1<ꢀ67$7(0(17ꢀ,1ꢀ$1<ꢀ%52&+85(ꢆꢀ35(66ꢀ  
5(/($6(ꢆꢀ$11281&(0(17ꢆꢀ$'9(57,6(0(17ꢆꢀ32,17ꢀ2)ꢀ  
6$/(ꢀ',63/$<ꢆꢀ(7&ꢅꢄꢅꢀꢀ  
<RXUꢀ5HVSRQVLELOLW\  
7+(ꢀ$%29(ꢀ:$55$17,(6ꢀ$5(ꢀ68%-(&7ꢀ72ꢀ7+(ꢀ  
)2//2:,1*ꢀ&21',7,216ꢈ  
ꢁꢆꢃꢀꢀ<RXꢀPXVWꢀSURYLGHꢀ\RXUꢀELOOꢀRIꢀVDOHꢀRUꢀRWKHUꢀSURRIꢀRIꢀSXUFKDVHꢄ  
ꢁꢋꢃꢀꢀ$OOꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀVHUYLFLQJꢀRIꢀWKLVꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀPXVWꢀEHꢀSHUIRUPHGꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀE\ꢀDQꢀ$63ꢄ  
ꢁꢇꢃꢀꢀ7KHꢀZDUUDQWLHVꢀIURPꢀ7&/ꢀDUHꢀHIIHFWLYHꢀRQO\ꢀLIꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀLVꢀꢁLꢃꢀSXUFKDVHGꢀDVꢀQHZꢀDQGꢀXQRSHQHGꢀIURPꢀ7&/ꢀRUꢀIURPꢀ7&/·Vꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀDXWKRUL]HGꢀGLVWULEXWRUVꢅꢀGHDOHUVꢀRUꢀUHVHOOHUVꢀꢁꢃ$'5·VꢃꢃꢀDQGꢀꢁLLꢃꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀORFDWHGꢌRSHUDWHGꢀLQꢀ&DQDGDꢄ  
ꢁꢍꢃꢀꢀ:DUUDQWLHVꢀH[WHQGꢀRQO\ꢀWRꢀPDWHULDOꢀGHIHFWVꢀLQꢀPDWHULDOVꢀRUꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZRUNPDQVKLSꢀDVꢀOLPLWHGꢀDERYHꢅꢀDQGꢀGRꢀQRWꢀH[WHQGꢀWRꢉ  
Dꢄ 6HUYLFHꢅꢀUHSDLUVꢀRUꢀUHSODFHPHQWꢀPDGHꢀQHFHVVDU\ꢀE\ꢀDFFLGHQWꢅ  
PLVXVHꢅꢀDEXVHꢅꢀPRLVWXUHꢅꢀOLTXLGVꢅꢀGXVWꢅꢀGLUWꢅꢀQHJOHFWꢅꢀDFFLGHQWꢅꢀ  
GDPDJHꢅꢀꢋꢍꢌꢎꢀDSSOLFDWLRQVꢅꢀLPSURSHUꢀLQVWDOODWLRQꢅꢀLPSURSHUꢀ  
<28ꢀ0867ꢀ5($'ꢀ$1'ꢀ)2//2:ꢀ$//ꢀ6(7ꢐ83ꢀ$1'ꢀ86$*(ꢀ  
,16758&7,216ꢀ,1ꢀ7+(ꢀ$33/,&$%/(ꢀ86(5ꢀ*8,'(6ꢀ$1'ꢌ25ꢀ  
0$18$/6ꢄꢀ,)ꢀ<28ꢀ)$,/ꢀ72ꢀ'2ꢀ62ꢅꢀ7+,6ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ0$<ꢀ  
127ꢀ)81&7,21ꢀ3523(5/<ꢀ$1'ꢀ<28ꢀ0$<ꢀ68))(5ꢀ'$0$*(ꢄꢀ  
7+,6ꢀ:$55$17<ꢀ:,//ꢀ127ꢀ&29(5ꢀ$1<ꢀ6(59,&(ꢀ7+$7ꢀ,6ꢀ  
5(48,5('ꢅꢀ,1ꢀ3$57ꢀ25ꢀ,1ꢀ:+2/(ꢅꢀ$6ꢀ$ꢀ5(68/7ꢀ2)ꢀ$1<ꢀ  
)$,/85(ꢀ72ꢀ)2//2:ꢀ7+(ꢀ6(7ꢐ83ꢀ$1'ꢀ86$*(ꢀ  
,16758&7,216ꢄꢀꢀꢀ7+,6ꢀ:$55$17<ꢀ'2(6ꢀ127ꢀ$33/<ꢀ$1'ꢀ  
6+$//ꢀ%(ꢀ92,'ꢀ$1'ꢀ81(1)25&($%/(ꢀ,)ꢀ7+(ꢀ'$9ꢀ  
352'8&7ꢀ,6ꢀ23(1('ꢅꢀ6(59,&('ꢅꢀ25ꢀ5(3$,5('ꢀ%<ꢀ  
3(56216ꢀ27+(5ꢀ7+$1ꢀ7+26(ꢀ$87+25,=('ꢀ%<ꢀ7&/ꢀ72ꢀ  
6(59,&(ꢀ25ꢀ5(3$,5ꢀ7+(ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢄ  
RSHUDWLRQꢅꢀLPSURSHUꢀFOHDQLQJꢅꢀLPSURSHUꢀPDLQWHQDQFHꢅꢀQRUPDO  
ꢀ
ZHDUꢀDQGꢀWHDUꢅꢀRUꢀDQ\ꢀRWKHUꢀꢀH[WHUQDOꢀFDXVHꢀRUꢀHYHQWꢅꢀDFWꢀRU  
RPLVVLRQꢀRXWVLGHꢀWKHꢀFRQWUROꢀRIꢀ7&/ꢅꢀLQFOXGLQJꢀILUHꢅꢀWKHIWꢅꢀDFWV  
RIꢀ*RGꢅꢀDOWHUDWLRQꢅꢀSRZHUꢀIDLOXUHVꢅꢀSRZHUꢀVXUJHVꢀRUꢀSRZHU  
VKRUWDJHVꢅꢀOLJKWQLQJꢅꢀRWKHUꢀHOHFWULFDOꢀIDXOWVꢅꢀꢀRUꢀUHSDLUVꢅꢀ  
ꢀ
PRGLILFDWLRQVꢀRUꢀUHSODFHPHQWVꢀE\ꢀSHUVRQVꢀRWKHUꢀWKDQꢀWKRVH  
DXWKRUL]HGꢀE\ꢀ7&/ꢀWRꢀVHUYLFHꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢏ  
Eꢄ 5HSODFHPHQWꢀRIꢀPLVVLQJꢅꢀGLVFDUGHGꢀRUꢀORVWꢀSDUWVꢅꢀWKHꢀ  
SURYLVLRQꢀRIꢀUHWURILWVꢅꢀRUꢀSUHYHQWLYHꢀPDLQWHQDQFHꢏ  
122 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 122  
2009/04/03 15:40:19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
,)ꢀ7+(ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ)$,/6ꢀ72ꢀ:25.ꢀ$6ꢀ:$55$17('ꢀ$%29(ꢁꢀ  
*HQHUDOꢁ3URYLVLRQV  
<285ꢀ62/(ꢀ$1'ꢀ(;&/86,9(ꢀ5(0('<ꢀ6+$//ꢀ%(ꢀ5(3$,5ꢀ25ꢀ  
5(3/$&(0(17ꢀ2)ꢀ7+(ꢀ'()(&7,9(ꢀ3$57ꢂꢀ,1ꢀ12ꢀ(9(17ꢀ:,//ꢀ  
7&/ꢁꢀ726+,%$ꢀ&25325$7,21ꢁꢀ7+(,5ꢀ$)),/,$7(6ꢁꢀ$'5Vꢀ25ꢀ  
$63Vꢀꢃ7+(ꢀꢀꢁ5(/$7('ꢁ3$57,(6ꢀꢁꢄꢀ%(ꢀ/,$%/(ꢀ72ꢀ<28ꢀ25ꢀ$1<ꢀ  
7+,5'ꢀ3$57<ꢀ)25ꢀ$1<ꢀ'$0$*(6ꢁꢀ021(<ꢁꢀ5(,0%856(0(17ꢁꢀ  
&2676ꢀ25ꢀ(;3(16(6ꢂꢀꢀ7+,6ꢀ/,0,7$7,21ꢀ$33/,(6ꢀ72ꢀ'$0$*(6ꢁꢀ  
021(<ꢁꢀ5(,0%856(0(17ꢁꢀ&2676ꢀ25ꢀ(;3(16(6ꢀ2)ꢀ$1<ꢀ.,1'ꢀ  
:+$762(9(5ꢀ,1&/8',1*ꢀ$1<ꢀ',5(&7ꢀ25ꢀ,1',5(&7ꢀ'$0$*(6ꢁꢀ  
'$0$*(ꢀ72ꢀ3523(57<ꢀ25ꢀ3(5621ꢁꢀ/267ꢀ352),76ꢁꢀ/267ꢀ  
6$9,1*6ꢁꢀ,1&219(1,(1&(ꢀ25ꢀ27+(5ꢀ63(&,$/ꢁꢀ,1&,'(17$/ꢁꢀ  
(;(03/$5<ꢀ25ꢀ&216(48(17,$/ꢀ'$0$*(6ꢁꢀ:+(7+(5ꢀ)25ꢀ  
%5($&+ꢀ2)ꢀ:$55$17<ꢁꢀ%5($&+ꢀ2)ꢀ&2175$&7ꢁꢀ7257ꢀ  
ꢃ,1&/8',1*ꢀ1(*/,*(1&(ꢄꢁꢀ81'(5ꢀ$ꢀ67$787(ꢀ25ꢀ81'(5ꢀ$1<ꢀ  
27+(5ꢀ/$:ꢀ25ꢀ)250ꢀ25ꢀ$&7,21ꢁꢀ25ꢀ:+(7+(5ꢀ$5,6,1*ꢀ287ꢀ  
2)ꢀ7+(ꢀ86(ꢀ2)ꢀ25ꢀ,1$%,/,7<ꢀ72ꢀ86(ꢀ7+(ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢁꢀ  
(9(1ꢀ,)ꢀ$1<ꢀ2)ꢀ7+(ꢀ5(/$7('ꢀ3$57,(6ꢀ+$6ꢀ%((1ꢀ$'9,6('ꢀ2)ꢀ  
7+(ꢀ3266,%,/,7<ꢀ2)ꢀ68&+ꢀ'$0$*(6ꢀ25ꢀ2)ꢀ$1<ꢀ&/$,0ꢀ%<ꢀ  
$1<ꢀ27+(5ꢀ3$57<ꢂꢀ  
,IꢀDQGꢀWRꢀWKHꢀH[WHQWꢀWKDWꢀDQ\ꢀSURYLVLRQꢀRIꢀWKLVꢀOLPLWHGꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀ  
VKRXOGꢀJHQHUDOO\ꢀEHꢀIRXQGꢀWRꢀEHꢀXQHQIRUFHDEOHꢁꢀWKHꢀ  
XQHQIRUFHDEOHꢀSURYLVLRQꢀVKDOOꢀEHꢀVHYHUHGꢀIURPꢀWKHꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀ  
DQGꢀGHHPHGꢀQRWꢀWRꢀIRUPꢀSDUWꢀRIꢀWKHꢀZDUUDQW\ꢂꢀꢀ7KHꢀUHPDLQLQJꢀ  
SURYLVLRQVꢀRIꢀWKLVꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀVKDOOꢀEHꢀDQGꢀUHPDLQꢀYDOLGꢀDQGꢀ  
HQIRUFHDEOHꢂꢀꢀ,IꢀDQGꢀWRꢀWKHꢀH[WHQWꢀWKDWꢀDQ\ꢀSURYLVLRQꢀRIꢀWKLVꢀ  
OLPLWHGꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀDVꢀLWꢀUHODWHVꢀWRꢀDQ\ꢀꢀRIꢀWKHꢀ5HODWHGꢀ3DUWLHVꢀLVꢀ  
IRXQGꢀWRꢀEHꢀLQYDOLGꢀRUꢀXQHQIRUFHDEOHꢀLQꢀUHVSHFWꢀRIꢀWKDWꢀSDUW\ꢀ  
ꢃWKHꢀꢀ([FOXGHGꢁ3DUW\ꢀꢁꢄꢁꢀWKHꢀ([FOXGHGꢀ3DUW\ꢀVKDOOꢀEHꢀGHHPHGꢀ  
WRꢀEHꢀVHYHUHGꢀRUꢀH[FOXGHGꢀIURPꢀWKHꢀSURYLVLRQꢁꢀDQGꢀWKHꢀSURYLVLRQꢀ  
VKDOOꢀUHPDLQꢀYDOLGꢁꢀHQIRUFHDEOHꢀDQGꢀDSSOLFDEOHꢀLQꢀUHVSHFWꢀRIꢀWKHꢀ  
RWKHUꢀRUꢀUHPDLQLQJꢀ5HODWHGꢀ3DUWLHVꢂ  
7RꢀWKHꢀH[WHQWꢀSHUPLWWHGꢀE\ꢀODZꢁꢀWKLVꢀOLPLWHGꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀVKDOOꢀEHꢀ  
JRYHUQHGꢀDQGꢀFRQVWUXHGꢀLQꢀDFFRUGDQFHꢀZLWKꢀWKHꢀODZVꢀRIꢀ2QWDULRꢂ  
,IꢀWKHUHꢀLVꢀDQ\ꢀLQFRQVLVWHQF\ꢀEHWZHHQꢀWKLVꢀOLPLWHGꢀZDUUDQW\ꢁꢀRQꢀ  
WKHꢀRQHꢀKDQGꢁꢀDQGꢀDQ\ꢀVWDWHPHQWꢀLQꢀWKHꢀSDFNDJLQJꢀRIꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ  
3URGXFWꢀRUꢀLQꢀDQ\ꢀRWKHUꢀGRFXPHQWꢀHQFORVHGꢀZLWKꢁꢀRUꢀXVHGꢀLQꢀWKHꢀ  
FRQWH[WꢀRIꢀWKHꢀSURPRWLRQꢀRUꢀVDOHꢀRIꢁꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢁꢀRQꢀWKHꢀ  
RWKHUꢀKDQGꢁꢀWKHꢀSURYLVLRQVꢀRIꢀWKLVꢀOLPLWHGꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀVKDOOꢀSUHYDLOꢂ  
1RꢀSHUVRQꢁꢀDJHQWꢁꢀGLVWULEXWRUꢁꢀGHDOHUꢀRUꢀFRPSDQ\ꢀLVꢀDXWKRUL]HGꢀWRꢀ  
FKDQJHꢁꢀPRGLI\ꢀRUꢀH[WHQGꢀWKHꢀWHUPVꢀRIꢀWKHVHꢀZDUUDQWLHVꢀLQꢀDQ\ꢀ  
PDQQHUꢀZKDWVRHYHUꢂꢀ  
+RZꢁWRꢁ2EWDLQꢁ:DUUDQW\ꢁ6HUYLFHV  
$UELWUDWLRQꢁDQGꢁ'LVSXWHꢁ5HVROXWLRQ  
7RꢀWKHꢀH[WHQWꢀQRWꢀSUHFOXGHGꢀE\ꢀODZꢁꢀDQ\ꢀFODLPꢁꢀGLVSXWHꢁꢀ  
,IꢁꢀDIWHUꢀIROORZLQJꢀDOOꢀRIꢀWKHꢀRSHUDWLQJꢀLQVWUXFWLRQVꢀLQꢀWKLVꢀPDQXDOꢀ  
DQGꢀFKHFNLQJꢀWKHꢀꢇ7URXEOHVKRRWLQJꢇꢀVHFWLRQꢁꢀ\RXꢀILQGꢀWKDWꢀ  
VHUYLFHꢀLVꢀQHHGHGꢅ  
FRQWURYHUV\ꢀRUꢀGLVDJUHHPHQWꢀꢃZKHWKHUꢀIRUꢀEUHDFKꢀRIꢀZDUUDQW\ꢁꢀ  
EUHDFKꢀRIꢀFRQWUDFWꢁꢀWRUWꢀꢃLQFOXGLQJꢀQHJOLJHQFHꢄꢁꢀXQGHUꢀDꢀVWDWXWHꢀ  
RUꢀXQGHUꢀDQ\ꢀRWKHUꢀODZꢀRUꢀIRUPꢀRIꢀDFWLRQꢄꢀDJDLQVWꢀDQ\ꢀRIꢀWKHꢀ  
5HODWHGꢀ3DUWLHVꢀDULVLQJꢀRXWꢀRIꢁꢀRUꢀRWKHUZLVHꢀUHODWLQJꢀWRꢅꢀꢃLꢄꢀWKLVꢀ  
ZDUUDQW\ꢆꢀꢃLLꢄꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢆꢀꢃLLLꢄꢀDQ\ꢀRUDOꢀRUꢀZULWWHQꢀUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVꢁꢀ  
VWDWHPHQWVꢁꢀEURFKXUHVꢁꢀSUHVVꢀUHOHDVHVꢁꢀꢀDGYHUWLVLQJꢁꢀDQQRXQFHPHQWꢁꢀ  
SRLQWꢀRIꢀVDOHꢀGLVSOD\ꢁꢀRUꢀSURPRWLRQDOꢀPDWHULDOꢀUHODWLQJꢀWRꢀWKHꢀ'$9ꢀ  
3URGXFWꢆꢀꢃLYꢄꢀWKHꢀUHODWLRQVKLSVꢀWKDWꢀUHVXOWꢀIURPꢀWKLVꢀZDUUDQW\ꢁꢀꢃWKHꢀ  
IRUHJRLQJꢀFODLPVꢁꢀGLVSXWHVꢀFRQWURYHUVLHVꢀDQGꢀGLVDJUHHPHQWVꢀDUHꢀ  
FROOHFWLYHO\ꢀUHIHUUHGꢀWRꢀDVꢀWKHꢀꢇ'LVSXWHꢇꢄꢁꢀVKDOOꢀEHꢀUHIHUUHGꢀWRꢀDQGꢀ  
UHVROYHGꢀE\ꢀILQDOꢀDQGꢀELQGLQJꢀDUELWUDWLRQꢀꢃWRꢀWKHꢀH[FOXVLRQꢀRIꢀWKHꢀ  
FRXUWVꢄꢂꢀꢀ7RꢀWKHꢀH[WHQWꢀQRWꢀSUHFOXGHGꢀE\ꢀODZꢁꢀ\RXꢀDJUHHꢀWRꢀZDLYHꢀDQ\ꢀ  
ULJKWꢀWKDWꢀ\RXꢀPD\ꢀKDYHꢀWRꢀFRPPHQFHꢀRUꢀSDUWLFLSDWHꢀLQꢀDQ\ꢀ  
UHSUHVHQWDWLYHꢀRUꢀFODVVꢀSURFHHGLQJꢀDJDLQVWꢀWKHꢀ5HODWHGꢀ3DUWLHVꢀ  
UHODWLQJꢀWRꢀDQ\ꢀ'LVSXWHꢂꢀꢀ,IꢀDQGꢀZKHUHꢀDSSOLFDEOHꢀDQGꢀWRꢀWKHꢀH[WHQWꢀQRWꢀ  
SUHFOXGHGꢀE\ꢀODZꢁꢀ\RXꢀIXUWKHUꢀDJUHHꢀWRꢀRSWꢀRXWꢀRIꢀDQ\ꢀVXFKꢀ  
UHSUHVHQWDWLYHꢀRUꢀFODVVꢀSURFHHGLQJVꢂꢀꢀ$UELWUDWLRQꢀRIꢀDQ\ꢀ'LVSXWHꢀZLOOꢀ  
EHꢀFRQGXFWHGꢀLQꢀWKHꢀIRUXPꢀDQGꢀLQꢀWKHꢀPDQQHUꢀDVꢀDJUHHGꢀWRꢀEHWZHHQꢀ  
\RXꢀDQGꢀ7&/ꢂꢀꢀ)DLOLQJꢀVXFKꢀDJUHHPHQWꢁꢀWKHꢀDUELWUDWLRQꢀZLOOꢀEHꢀ  
FRQGXFWHGꢀE\ꢀRQHꢀDUELWUDWRUꢀSXUVXDQWꢀWRꢀWKHꢀODZVꢀDQGꢀUXOHVꢀUHODWLQJꢀ  
WRꢀDUELWUDWLRQꢀJHQHUDOO\ꢀLQꢀIRUFHꢀLQꢀWKHꢀMXULVGLFWLRQꢀLQꢀZKLFKꢀ\RXꢀUHVLGHꢀ  
DWꢀWKHꢀWLPHꢀWKDWꢀWKHꢀ'LVSXWHꢀDULVHVꢂꢀꢀ7RꢀWKHꢀH[WHQWꢀQRWꢀSUHFOXGHGꢀE\ꢀ  
ODZꢁꢀQRꢀFODLPꢁꢀGLVSXWHꢁꢀFRQWURYHUV\ꢀRUꢀGLVDJUHHPHQWꢀRIꢀDQ\ꢀRWKHUꢀ  
SHUVRQꢀPD\ꢀEHꢀMRLQHGꢀRUꢀFRPELQHGꢀZLWKꢀDQ\ꢀ'LVSXWHꢀE\ꢀ\RXꢁꢀZLWKRXWꢀ  
WKHꢀSULRUꢀZULWWHQꢀFRQVHQWꢀRIꢀ7&/ꢂꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢃꢈꢄꢀꢀꢀ7RꢀILQGꢀWKHꢀQHDUHVWꢀ$63ꢁꢀYLVLWꢀ7&/·VꢀZHEꢀVLWHꢀDWꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZꢂWRVKLEDꢂFDꢁꢀRUꢀFDOOꢀWROOꢀIUHHꢀꢈꢉꢊꢋꢋꢉꢌꢍꢊꢉꢎꢏꢋꢏꢂꢀ  
ꢃꢌꢄꢀꢀꢀ3UHVHQWꢀ\RXUꢀELOOꢀRIꢀVDOHꢀRUꢀRWKHUꢀSURRIꢀRIꢀSXUFKDVHꢀWRꢀWKHꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ$63ꢂ ꢀ  
)RUꢀDGGLWLRQDOꢀLQIRUPDWLRQꢁꢀYLVLWꢀ7&/ꢐVꢀZHEVLWHꢀDWꢀZZZꢂWRVKLEDꢂFD  
&ULWLFDOꢁ$SSOLFDWLRQV  
7KHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀ\RXꢀKDYHꢀSXUFKDVHGꢀLVꢀQRWꢀGHVLJQHGꢀIRUꢀDQ\ꢀ´FULWLFDOꢀ  
DSSOLFDWLRQVꢂµꢀ´&ULWLFDOꢀDSSOLFDWLRQVµꢀPHDQVꢀOLIHꢀVXSSRUWꢀV\VWHPVꢁꢀ  
PHGLFDOꢀDSSOLFDWLRQVꢁꢀFRQQHFWLRQVꢀWRꢀLPSODQWHGꢀPHGLFDOꢀGHYLFHVꢁꢀ  
FRPPHUFLDOꢀWUDQVSRUWDWLRQꢁꢀQXFOHDUꢀIDFLOLWLHVꢀRUꢀV\VWHPVꢀRUꢀDQ\ꢀRWKHUꢀ  
DSSOLFDWLRQVꢀZKHUHꢀ'$9ꢀ3URGXFWꢀIDLOXUHꢀFRXOGꢀOHDGꢀWRꢀLQMXU\ꢀWRꢀSHUVRQV  
ꢀ
RUꢀORVVꢀRIꢀOLIHꢀRUꢀFDWDVWURSKLFꢀSURSHUW\ꢀGDPDJHꢂ  
,)ꢀ7+(ꢀ&86720(5ꢀ86(6ꢀ7+(ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ,1ꢀ$1<ꢀ&5,7,&$/ꢀ  
$33/,&$7,21ꢁꢀ7+(ꢀ&86720(5ꢀ²ꢀ$1'ꢀ127ꢀ7&/ꢁꢀ,76ꢀ$)),/,$7(6ꢁꢀ  
$'5Vꢀ25ꢀ$63Vꢀ²ꢀ$6680(ꢀ62/(ꢀ$1'ꢀ)8//ꢀ5(63216,%,/,7<ꢀ)25ꢀ  
68&+ꢀ86(ꢂꢀꢀ7&/ꢀ5(6(59(6ꢀ7+(ꢀ5,*+7ꢀ72ꢀ5()86(ꢀ72ꢀ6(59,&(  
$1<ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ86('ꢀ,1ꢀ$ꢀ&5,7,&$/ꢀ$33/,&$7,21ꢂꢀꢀ7&/ꢁꢀ,76ꢀ  
$)),/,$7(6ꢁꢀ$'5Vꢀ$1'ꢀ$63Vꢀ+(5(%<ꢀ',6&/$,0ꢀ$1<ꢀ$1'ꢀ$//ꢀ  
/,$%,/,7<ꢁꢀ'$0$*(6ꢀ$1'ꢀ&216(48(1&(6ꢀ$5,6,1*ꢀ287ꢀ2)ꢀ7+(ꢀ  
6(59,&(ꢀ25ꢀ5()86$/ꢀ72ꢀ6(59,&(ꢀ68&+ꢀ'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ$1'ꢀ  
)857+(5ꢀ',6&/$,0ꢀ$1<ꢀ$1'ꢀ$//ꢀ/,$%,/,7<ꢁꢀ&216(48(1&(6ꢀ$1'ꢀ  
'$0$*(6ꢀ7+$7ꢀ0$<ꢀ$5,6(ꢀ25ꢀ5(68/7ꢀ)520ꢀ7+(ꢀ86(ꢀ2)ꢀ7+(ꢀ  
'$9ꢀ352'8&7ꢀ,1ꢀ$1<ꢀ&5,7,&$/ꢀ$33/,&$7,216ꢂ  
EN 123  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 123  
2009/04/03 15:40:20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
124 EN  
E9SK0UD_DVR670KU_EN_v1.1.indd 124  
2009/04/03 15:40:21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Taylor Thermometer 9878E User Manual
Therma Tru Door Hinged Patio Door System Single Panel Assembly Unit User Manual
Trango Broadband Stereo System AD900 9 User Manual
TRENDnet Router Net Spot Wireless Access Point User Manual
Tyco Network Card DIU 210 User Manual
Vantec Network Card PCI PCI E Card CardBus User Manual
VocoPro Cassette Player Cassette Deck User Manual
VTech Telephone erisbusinesssystem 4 line office phones main console User Manual
Wayne Plumbing Product Shallow Well User Manual
Weber Outdoor Fireplace 43028 User Manual